JP7128681B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

As a pachinko game machine configured to be able to set one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set value, For example, there is one described in Patent Document 1. Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2002-200002 describes that display control of effects based on set values is performed to display character images of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902

However, in the game machine as described in Patent Document 1, it is not always possible to increase the interest in the game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that enhances amusement in games.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention
A game machine capable of playing games using game media and being controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a game value imparting means for imparting a game value based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area;
an information display means capable of displaying information about the game value imparted by the game value imparting means;
setting means that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values;
Advantageous state control means capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on set values;
Output means capable of outputting information including setting information capable of specifying setting values; Suggestive effect executing means capable of executing suggestive effects at different ratios according to the setting values specified from the setting information output from the output means; ,
and a detection means capable of detecting the action of the player,
The suggestive effect includes a specific suggestive effect in which a plurality of options are presented and one of the options is selected based on the detection of the action of the player by the detecting means, and a specific degree of set value. and a second suggestive effect with a low specified degree of set value,
In the specific suggestion effect, the ratio at which specific options are presented differs according to the set value,
The specific option is an option that can be presented and can be selected when set to any one of a plurality of setting values,
The suggestion effect execution means is
During a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on to a predetermined time, the suggestive effect can be executed at a higher rate than during a period different from the predetermined period,
When the setting information output from the output means is not normal under control in a normal state, the suggestive effect is produced at a ratio corresponding to a predetermined set value with a low degree of advantage for the player among the plurality of set values. is executable and
When the setting information output from the output means is not normal while being controlled to a special state more advantageous than the normal state, the second suggestive effect can be executed without executing the first suggestive effect. ,
The information display means is capable of displaying set values that have been set.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.
(1) In addition, the game machine is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state;
A title notification means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of informing the title corresponding to the suggested effect,
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestive effect when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the suggestive effect (for example, FIGS. 9(D) and (F)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing a plurality of types of the suggestive effects,
In a plurality of types of suggestive effects, at least part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executed in a common mode (eg, FIG. 9(C)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which suggestive effect is to be executed, thereby improving interest.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
At a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation even after the title is announced.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The suggestive effect executing means executes at least a first suggestive effect (for example, a ready-to-reach effect of super reach A and super reach B) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a ready-to-reach effect of super reach D and super reach E) as the suggestive effect. is possible and
In the second suggestive effect, the title notifying means may notify the title corresponding to the second suggestive effect from the start of the second suggestive effect.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification of the title according to the suggestive effect, so the effect of the effect is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above,
A ratio of control to the advantageous state may be higher when the first suggestive effect is executed than when the second suggestive effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the performance effect is improved.

(6) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above,
The suggestive effect executing means may be capable of executing the suggestive effect in an effect mode related to the title notified during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the performance effect is improved.

(7) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (6) above,
detection means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting the action of the player;
Specific display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that performs specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means,
The specific display execution means is
As the specific displays, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047 and a stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. is possible and
changing the first specific display to the second specific display after displaying the first specific display in a non-effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, FIG. 17(E), FIG. 18(I));
During the valid period of detection by the detection means, an action effect using the changed second specific display may be executed (for example, FIGS. 18(J) and (K)).
According to such a configuration, the performance effect is improved.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
As a suggestive display suggesting the degree of expectation of the control to the advantageous state, a first suggestive display whose display size is the first size (display by the shutter image 31AK061 of the first size displayed during the shutter effect shown in FIG. 19(a) etc.) and a second suggestive display whose display size is the second size (e.g. second size reach title image 31AK062 displayed during the reach title effect shown in FIG. 19(d)) (for example, image Display device 5, production control CPU 120) is further provided,
The display means is
Multiple types of elements with different aspects (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc. shown in FIGS. 19(a) and (d)) It is possible to display a specific image (such as a fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 19(a) and 19(d)) composed of
When both the first suggestive display and the second suggestive display are displayed in the pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestive display and the second suggestive display. (the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19(a) and 19(d) may be displayed so as to include the elements E1 to E5, etc.).
According to such a configuration, the specific image can be preferably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestive display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that the specific image has been displayed.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating a variation pattern and the kind of reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of an advance notice effect determination process; FIG. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in an advance notice production|presentation determination process. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a modification. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in a state in which the gaming machine frame is opened. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a losing variation pattern determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a non-reach loss variation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in characterizing part 121IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in characterizing part 121IW. 4 is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing and setting change processing; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing processing executed when power is turned on; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor in setting change processing; It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production control main processing. 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an initial payout determination table; It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading notice setting processing. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a look-ahead zone effect determination table; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start waiting processing; It is an explanatory view showing a pre-game suggestion effect determination table. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a super reach type determination table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an icon pattern determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an icon pattern determination table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table; 10 is a flow chart showing an example of in-game suggestive effect determination processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a game-in-game suggestion effect determination table; It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation determination processing during a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a suggestion production|presentation determination table in a big hit, a character object production|presentation determination table, and a light-guide plate production|presentation determination table. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a flow chart which shows small hit end production processing (step S175). FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a production stage determination table; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation mode in the case of changing an production|presentation stage after completion|finish of a small-hit game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production|presentation mode in the case of changing an production|presentation stage after completion|finish of a small-hit game. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rendering mode of a look-ahead zone rendering; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a rendering mode of a look-ahead zone rendering; A description will be given of the effect mode of the suggestive effect during reach. A description will be given of the effect mode of the suggestive effect during reach. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a security cover in Modification 1; It is a figure which shows opening and closing of the frame for game machines in the modified example 1. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a security cover in modification 2; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing opening and closing of the gaming machine frame in modification 2; It is an explanatory diagram showing a pachinko game machine in the third modification. 16 is a flowchart showing variation pattern setting processing in Modification 4. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing in Modification 4. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a suggestion production|presentation determination table after a small hit. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of selection suggestion effect determination processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a selection suggestion effect execution determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a selection option determination table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation option determination table; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a selection option presentation position determination table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a presentation mode of a selection suggestion presentation;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is ended.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 31AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 31AK of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining variation patterns and types of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result is "losing". , The variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, and the display result is "losing". Variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the present embodiment, ready-to-win effects such as normal reach and super-to-win A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the ready-to-win effect is also referred to as a suggestive effect suggesting that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (jackpot reliability) when each reach is executed is normal reach < super reach E < super reach D < super reach C < super reach B, as represented by the number of black stars in FIG. <It becomes higher in the order of super reach A.> In addition, you may provide the reach which confirms that it will become a big hit.

In this embodiment, super reach is performed via normal reach. Further, during the ready-to-win effect of the super reach, there is a case where a developing effect to develop (promote) to a more reliable reach is executed. Variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc. and variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. shown in FIG. 8A are variation patterns corresponding to execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 8A shows a variation pattern in which the reliability level develops to super reach, which is one level higher, but a variation pattern in which the reliability level develops by two levels or more is also provided. Also, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed multiple times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach which has the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is announced at a predetermined timing after establishment of the reach. As shown in FIG. 8B, the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, for the super reach E, which has the lowest reliability among the super reach, the title of the reach is notified only by display, and for the other super reach, the title is notified by display and sound. In this way, the title notification is executed by more production devices for reach with a high degree of reliability than for reach with a low degree of reliability. As a result, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of anticipation, thereby improving the performance effect. Note that the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or not depending on the reliability. Also, even in the same ready-to-win effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typeface (linear script, square script, etc.) of title characters may be changed according to the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, but may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the content of the reach effect, and the like.

(Example of production operation of characteristic portion 31AK)
Next, an example of an effect operation in this embodiment will be described. The following production operations are executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 . 9 and 10 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 9(A) shows that variable display of decorative patterns is performed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. FIG. . After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 9(B), the decorative symbols showing the number 7 on the "left" and "right" stop and enter the ready-to-win state. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of super reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001, which is an ally character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the ready reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the super ready-to-win effect, such as when the introductory portion of the ready-to-reach effect (also referred to as super ready-to-win effect) ends, the entire screen of the image display device 5 appears as shown in FIG. 9(D). , the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the characters "SP Reach A") is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the Reach title name (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. , Super Reach A are announced. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. The subsequent part of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win A is executed. A production in which characters confront each other is also called a battle production. In the battle production, if an ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character is defeated, it becomes a loss.

It should be noted that when the lines are displayed on the image display device 5 during the super ready-to-win effect, a sound corresponding to the lines may be output from the speaker 8 . In addition, the words are not limited to being displayed in balloons as shown in FIG.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the ready reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of the super ready-to-win effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super ready-to-win effect, as shown in FIG. , characters of "SP reach B") are displayed, and a voice corresponding to the title name of reach (here, "super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, thereby announcing the title of super reach B. be. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is deleted, and as shown in FIG. The succeeding portion of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win B is executed.

In this way, in super ready-to-win A and super ready-to-win B, the title of ready-to-win is reported when a predetermined period has passed since the start of the super ready-to-win effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction part of the super ready-to-win effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

Also, in Super Reach A (Fig. 9 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (Fig. 9 (C) → (F) → (G) ...), the title is In the introductory part until the notification is given, the super ready-to-win effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9(C)). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super reach will be achieved after the start of the super reach effect and which title will be announced. In super reach A and super reach B, it is not limited to making the production mode until the title is announced completely common, but at least one You may make it make the part into a common production mode. For example, in the introductory portion of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a Super Reach production (for example, a production that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified after that. can be By doing so, the performance effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the performance. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to specify which super reach is to be achieved.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of super reach D, as shown in FIG. 9(H), the title 31AK007 of super reach D (here, the characters "SP reach D") is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, the title of Super Reach D is notified by outputting a voice corresponding to the title name of Reach from the speaker 8 (here, "Kill the enemy"). In this way, in super reach D, the title is announced at the start of the super reach effect. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation level suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the level of expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 9(H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation for a big hit, but it does not have to be completely consistent with the degree of reliability of the reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D is not to notify the title name as it is, but to notify the contents of Reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of title notification by sound is varied depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

After the title is announced in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9(I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation suggestive display 31AK008 continue to be displayed in a reduced size in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach performance. In addition, FIG. 9(I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 9(C) (super reach A, super reach B), but a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D may be executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 9(J), character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, dialogue 31AK004 of character 31AK001 is displayed, and a super reach D reach effect is executed in which character 31AK001 and character 31AK009 confront each other. be.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of super reach E, as shown in FIG. 10A, the title 31AK010 of super reach E (here, the characters "SP reach E") is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5. Thus, the title of Super Reach E is announced. Note that in Super Reach E, the title is not announced by voice. Along with the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011, which is an enemy character, are displayed, the line 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is performed. executed. In this way, in Super Ready-to-Wear E, titles are announced together with the progress of the ready-to-win effect. In super reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach effect.

In the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win E with low reliability of big hit, the title is notified without stopping the progress of the ready-to-win performance, thereby preventing the player from having excessive expectations. On the other hand, in the reach effects of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title is announced (Fig. 9 (D), (F), ( H)). By doing so, the title notification can be executed in accordance with the super ready-to-win effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach even in the super reach performance such as the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach D. Contrary to this embodiment, in the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win with high reliability of big win, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the ready-to-win effect. In the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win with low reliability of big win, the progress of the ready-to-win performance may be stopped and the title may be announced.

(Title announcement timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in super ready-to-reach A and super ready-to-reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period of time has passed after the start of the super ready-to-win effect, and in super ready-to-win D and super ready-to-e E, the super ready-to-win effect is announced. The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification can be executed according to the ready-to-win effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B with high reliability of big hit, the title is notified after a predetermined period has passed after the start of super reach performance, and super reach D and super reach D with low reliability of big hit are announced. In E, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, but in the case of reach with high reliability of big hit, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low reliability of big hit, super. The title may be announced after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the ready-to-win effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, the title is announced on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in super reach D and super reach E, the image display device 5 A title is announced in a part (second area) of the screen of . By doing so, the title notification can be executed according to the ready-to-win effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, when the hit reliability is high, title notification is performed in a wider display area than when the reliability is low, so effective title notification is possible. The title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title may be displayed on the entire background as a background for title notification. It may be a thing (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. In addition, the display areas for title notification may be differentiated between super reach A and super reach B, and the display areas for title notification may be differentiated between super reach D and super reach E.

The method of differentiating the display area for title notification according to the ready-to-win effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the ready-to-win effect. For example, when the hit reliability is high, the title notification may be performed in a narrower display area than when the reliability is low. Further, when the display area for title notification is changed according to the ready-to-win effect, the display area may be changed as in this embodiment, or the display location may be changed.

(Expectation indication)
In this embodiment, in the title announcement in super reach A and super reach B with high reliability of big hit, super reach D with lower reliability of big hit than super reach A and super reach B is displayed without displaying the expectation indication. In the title notification in , the expectation level suggestion display was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming repetitive. In addition, in the title notification of the super reach E, which has a lower reliability of the big hit than the super reach D, the expectation suggestive display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his sense of anticipation due to the display of the expectation suggesting display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with the low reliability. At least a part of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach E may display the expectation level suggestion display.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 9(H), the indication indicating the degree of expectation is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars. You may make it display the numerical value which carried out. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9H and the like, in the case of indicating by the number of black stars, half of the black stars may be displayed to increase the number of levels of expectations.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in the super reach A and the super reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Also, in super reach D and super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until a final effect, which will be described later, is executed. As a result, in super reach D and super reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach performance. Further, by doing so, the title notification can be executed according to the ready-to-win effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the display end timing of the title can be changed arbitrarily because the effect can be improved regardless of the timing.

In addition, although the production operation of the reach production of the super reach C is omitted here, for example, title notification and expectation suggestive display according to the reliability of the big hit may be executed.

(Decision production)
After each ready-to-win performance is executed, at the timing of deriving the display result (final stage of the variable display), a decision performance for informing whether or not the display result will be a ``jackpot'' is executed. The fixed effects include a fixed effect indicating that the display result is a "big hit" and a fixed effect indicating that the display result is a "loss". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10(B), an effect is executed in which an image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 . After that, if the display result is "big hit", an image 31AK013 indicating that the friendly character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. A fixed decoration pattern is derived. If the display result is "losing", an image indicating that the friendly character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified during the ready-to-win effect, the title notification is finished before the final effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the decided effect, and to perform a well-balanced title notification.

In the production operation examples shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, during the ready-to-win production of super ready-to-win, the decoration pattern is reduced in the lower right part of the image display device 5 to execute variable display, but during the ready-to-win production. The display of the decorative pattern may be arbitrary. For example, the decoration pattern may not be displayed during the ready-to-win effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of ready-to-win effect.

In addition, when displaying characters permanently displayed during pending display, active display, variable display, and display related to cellphone interlocking on the image display device 5, they are not displayed appropriately during the ready-to-win effect of super reach in order to draw attention to the ready-to-win effect. may be At that time, during low-reliability ready-to-win effects such as super ready-to-win E, these displays may remain displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations due to the low-reliability ready-to-win effect, and to make the player pay attention to the ready-to-win effect in the highly-reliable ready-to-win effect.

(development production)
Next, a description will be given of an example of an effect operation when the development effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 11(A), when the development effect is executed while the ready-to-reach effect of super reach D is being executed (the title notification of super reach D is being executed), as shown in FIG. As shown, the ready-to-win effect is interrupted and an effect is executed in which the screen is torn. After that, when it develops to super reach A, as shown in FIG. 11(C), the title of super reach A is announced, and the reach performance of super reach A is executed. In the case of developing into super reach B, as shown in FIG. 11(D), the title of super reach B is notified, and the reach effect of super reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the destination reach is a reach in which title notification is performed by display and sound, the title notification is performed again by display and sound.

Note that the development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11(B), and it may be a effect such that the screen gradually cracks and breaks, or a sandstorm (display of malfunction) is displayed. You may do so. By setting it as such production|presentation, an unexpected production|presentation can be performed. It should be noted that there may be a fake development production such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Suggestion of expectations)
In the production operation example shown in FIG. 9(H), the expectation suggestive display 31AK008 was designed to display black stars indicating the degree of expectation from the beginning, but five white stars are displayed first, and gradually You may make it perform the expectation degree suggestion production which suggests an expectation degree by becoming a black star.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12(A), when announcing the title of Super Reach D, an expectation suggestive display 31AK021 of five white stars is displayed first. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestive display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. A production that fits in one of the white stars is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12(D) and (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, tone quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (every number of stars). At the stage where the number of black stars corresponding to the level of expectation fits in the level of expectation suggestive display 31AK021, the black stars are highlighted by shining as shown in FIG. 12(F). By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation level suggesting effect has ended.

In the example shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation level indicated by the expectation level suggestion display is raised one step at a time, but two or more black stars are displayed. It may be displayed so that the degree of expectation rises by two or more levels. Alternatively, a half black star may be displayed to raise the expectation level by half. In this case, different sounds or the same sound may be output according to the number of stars displayed (the number of levels of rising expectations). For example, the same sound may be output when half black stars are displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Moreover, there may be a case where the sound is not output. By doing so, the expectation degree suggesting effects are diversified, and the effects of the effects are improved. In addition, the same black star image will be displayed regardless of the number of stages of expectations that increase at once, and the black stars will increase according to the number of stages of expectations that will increase. You may make it perform the production|presentation which does.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even when the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main substrate 11, the effect based on the command is executed in different effect modes. In each production mode, the background displayed on the image display device 5, the character, the motif, the sound output from the speaker 8, etc. may be different. The production mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changed by the player's operation.

FIGS. 12G to 12L show an example of the effect operation of the title notification and the degree-of-expectation effect in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes. In the normal mode, title notification and expectation suggesting effects are executed as shown in FIGS. In the special mode, the ready-to-reach performance based on the variation pattern of super ready-to-reach D is the ready-to-reach performance of super ready-to-reach D2 that is different from the ready-to-reach performance of super ready-to-win D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of super reach D is designated, title 31AK023 of super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 12(G). At this time, a sound corresponding to the title name of READY is output from the speaker 8, but a sound different from that in the normal mode (for example, a sound with a different tone) is output. Also, the expectation level suggestion display 31AK024 in super reach D2 is not star-shaped but diamond-shaped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 12(H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestive display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. The effect is executed so that it fits in one of the white rhombuses. At this time, a sound "pong" is output from the speaker 8 indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12(J) and (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At the stage where the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation has settled in the expectation suggestive display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted in such a manner that they shine, as shown in FIG. 12(L). In this way, by varying the notification mode of the title according to the effect mode (state when the ready-to-win effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect is diversified and the effect is enhanced. improves.

FIG. 12 shows an example of the effect operation when the super reach D variation pattern is specified, but depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), other reach effect ) may be made to have different presentation modes. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the ready-to-win effect is executed), whether or not to report the title of ready-to-win, and the execution ratio of the title to be reported may be varied. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the title of ready-to-win may not be announced. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the taste of the player, thereby improving the effect of the effect.

In this embodiment, the expectation level is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation level indication display, and the expectation level suggestion effect is executed to gradually increase the number of black stars. It is also possible to execute an expectation level suggesting effect in which the number of displays suggesting is gradually reduced. Such an expectation level suggesting effect may be executed in addition to the expectation level suggesting effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Another example of development production)
In the case of executing the expectation degree suggesting effect in which the display indicating the degree of expectation of the expectation degree suggesting display is increased step by step, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the degree of expectation. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed all at once instead of step by step. For example, as shown in FIG. 13(A), the title Super Reach D is notified, and after completing the effect of increasing the number of black stars in stages, as shown in FIG. A development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when an operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. The title of Reach C is announced. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has developed. Under the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestive display 31AK033 with three black stars is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. It should be noted that after the movable body 32 has moved, it is also possible to execute a development effect in which the title and the expectation suggestive display are changed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as the advance notice effect, a title advance notice for giving notice of the degree of reliability of a big hit is executed according to the title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title, etc.). For example, as shown in FIG. 14(A), the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach A is output from the speaker 8, thereby announcing the title of Super Reach A. After that, as shown in FIG. 14(B), a title announcement is executed in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red. Thus, the title is displayed in black when the title announcement is not performed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title announcement is performed. In the title announcement shown in FIG. 14, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the title of Reach is notified by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Note that the timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display of the title.

Further, when a title announcement is executed in which the display mode (display color) of the title is changed, after the display mode of the title is changed, a sound corresponding to the display mode after the change may be output. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Also, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the changed title.

(Execution timing of title notification)
It is preferable that the notification of the title in reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) such as the advance effect and the development effect, which increases the expectation of being controlled to the big hit advantage state. By doing so, once the title is announced, an effect that raises the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the announcement effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the announcement effect and the effect mode. The advance notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 within the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is the super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001).

If it is a super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the super reach title (whether or not to execute a title announcement) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the super ready-to-win title is determined according to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "losing", for example, according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16(A). As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the super reach title is "black", "red", one that changes from "black" to "red", and one that changes from "black" to "fruit pattern". , and those that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the reliability of the big hit increases in this order (ascending order). That is, the reliability of the big win differs depending on the timing of changing the display color of the title. By doing so, the player will pay attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the presentation effect will be improved.

In addition, the "fruit pattern" may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the title display area may be "fruit pattern". . There may be a pattern displayed as a “fruit pattern” from the beginning. As for the display color that changes, the display color may change after the title notification is executed, as shown in FIG. For the object whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the big win reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes. Also, since the title display period differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of a super reach that has a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of change timings may be provided and one of the change timings may be determined. In the case of super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than in super reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as production modes, in the normal mode the display color of the title is determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. Determines the display color of the title in different proportions. In the special mode, the pattern of display colors and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by varying the manner of execution of the title announcement (display color and display color change timing) depending on the presentation mode, the presentation is diversified and the presentation effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as the advance notice effect, the advance notice of the big hit reliability is executed according to the display mode of the character's words (for example, the display color of the words, etc.) in the ready-to-win effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of super ready-to-win, the display color of the character's words in the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win (whether or not to execute advance notice of the words) is decided (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "losing", the display color of the lines in the ready-to-win effect is determined, for example, by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16(C). As shown in FIG. 16(C), the display colors of the words in the ready-to-win effect are "white", "red", and those that change from "white" to "red", in this order (ascending order). Reliability is high. That is, the reliability of the big win differs depending on the timing of changing the display color of the words. By doing so, the player will pay attention to the change timing of the display color of the words, and the production effect will be improved. As for the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the words are displayed. For the object whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the big win reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes.

Also, the reliability of the big win may be different depending on the combination of the effect modes of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the same effect mode (display color) is included in the title notice and the dialogue notice, the reliability of the big win may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Also, the reliability of the big win may differ depending on the combination of the change timings of the presentation modes of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the change timing is the same, the big win reliability may be higher than when the change timing is different, or the big win reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

If there are a normal mode and a special mode as production modes, the special mode may determine the display color of the words at a rate different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the pattern of display colors and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

It should be noted that, in place of the speech notice, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit may be executed by a change in the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the reliability of the big win differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the lines in the ready-to-win effect, or when it is determined that the change pattern is not super-ready-to-win (step AK31S001; No), the presence or absence of other advance notice effects and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the decision results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect decision processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, it is possible to execute the title notice and the dialogue notice in the case of super reach. and at least one of the speech announcement may be made executable. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice are explained as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16, but the determination ratio is arbitrary, and the determination ratio may be changed according to the type of super reach, for example. By doing so, it is possible to execute the notice effect according to the type of ready-to-win, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice differ in the number of executable rendering modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed). By doing so, the presentation becomes diverse and the presentation effect is enhanced. In the title announcement and the dialogue announcement, the number of executable effects may be changed arbitrarily, and the number and types of executable effects may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a notice effect with a sense of unity, and the player can easily grasp the reliability of the big win.

(Effect production)
When the effect mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode will change may be executed. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and an effect effect in which the image affects at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. After the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or lines may be changed. The effect mode of effect effect (effect effect image, etc.) may be common to both the title and the dialogue. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or lines does not change even though the action effect is executed. When the action effect is to be executed, whether or not to execute the effect effect, the execution timing, and the mode of effect may be determined based on the determination results relating to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such determination may be performed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, depending on the presentation mode of the action presentation, the rate at which the presentation mode of at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the presentation mode changes due to the action presentation) may be different. It is possible to make the ratio of the dialogue notice and the change of which production mode (the ratio of which effect is applied) different, or the ratio of what color (how many stages) the change is made to be. . By executing such an action effect, the player will pay attention to which of the title or the words will be affected when the action effect image is displayed, thereby improving the effect. In addition, when there are a plurality of production modes, whether or not to execute the action production and the production mode may be determined at different ratios according to the production modes. By doing so, it is possible to execute an action effect corresponding to the effect mode, and the effect of the effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of either the title or the dialogue is selected according to the effect content of the ready-to-win effect (for example, the action of the character, the effect content in the battle effect, etc.). may change. By doing so, the player will pay attention to the contents of the ready-to-win effect.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, all of the features described in the above embodiments are not essential components, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5 , a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3 . Although expressed as a sub-liquid crystal here, the sub-display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot-matrix LED. The sub-liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. The sub-liquid crystal executes various effects such as advance notice effects and display of pending display. For example, the title notification may be executed in the sub-liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed after the title notification as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the degree of expectation suggestive display. In this case, after announcing the title on the image display device 5, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the degree of expectation suggestive display. By doing so, the title and the expectation level suggesting display can be displayed without interfering with the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation level suggesting display become easy to understand.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of the title of the ready-to-win effect as a suggestive effect has been described. may For example, as a preview effect (for example, a pre-read preview effect), when executing a pre-read zone effect that shifts to a plurality of zones (stages, effect modes, etc.) with different background images and effect modes on the image display device 5, the transitioned zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. In the case of presenting a mission ("reach with 7", "annihilate the enemy using a stick controller", etc.) and executing a mission effect that gives the player an advantage when the mission is accomplished, The present invention may be applied to mission title notification.

(Modification 1 of characteristic portion 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when the timing for deriving the display result comes, a decided effect is executed to notify whether or not the display result will be a "big hit", and then the display result is shown ( 10 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and if a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the win or loss of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the player's operation, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

FIGS. 17 and 18 are diagrams showing an example of a super ready-to-win effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17A, after the image display device 5 enters the reach mode, for example, as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17(C)-(F) and 18(G)-(I), a ready-to-win effect is executed in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 face each other.

Along with the ready-to-win effect, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 17(C). As a result, an operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modified example, a plurality of types of operation effect images are prepared to indicate that an operation effect is to be executed. The reliability of the big win differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect will be executed during the ready-to-win effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 17D, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. change to

After that, as shown in FIG. 18H, a cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. Effect 31AK050 is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modified example, when the operation effect image changes, an action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. It should be noted that the operation effect image may change without accompanying the effect effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

After that, before a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the restriction line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. , a display prompting an operation to pull the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation valid period during which the operation to the stick controller 31A is valid.

Here, when an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 18(L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. Note that if no operation is detected within a predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 18L is automatically displayed.

In this modified example, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image<large button image<stick image. The reliability of the jackpot is high. Even when an operation performance image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to an operation performance image with high reliability during ready-to-win performance, so that the performance effect is improved and the expectation of the player is increased. can be maintained.

17 and 18 omit the notification of the title of the reach and the indication of the degree of expectation. may be executed. The determination of operation effects and operation effect images (whether there is an operation effect, whether there is an operation effect image to be displayed, whether there is an effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG.

(Modification 2 of characteristic portion 31AK)
A suggestive display that suggests the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state may be performed. For example, a shutter effect for performing the first suggestive display and a reach title effect for performing the second suggestive display may be executed. In the shutter effect, the effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the start of the variable display. In addition, in the ready-to-win effect, after the ready-to-win effect, an effect to display a ready-to-win title indicating the development destination of the ready-to-win effect is executed. A specific image may be included and displayed when either the shutter display or the reach title display is displayed. The ready-to-win title effect may be the same as the title announcement in the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

A specific image is an image with a high degree of reliability of a big hit that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The multiple types of elements include a banana image as element E1, a melon image as element E2, an apple image as element E3, a watermelon image as element E4, and a strawberry image as element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is the specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Also, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 forming the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Also, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit within the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter performance is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the reliability of the big win is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when the ready-to-win title is displayed during execution of the ready-to-win effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the reliability of the big win is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. It should be noted that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as the image indicating the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the ready-to-win title effect are executed. For example, white image<blue image<red image<fruit pattern image may be prepared in order of the degree of reliability of the big hit (for example, a red shutter or a reach title with red characters). Then, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big win.

When performing the shutter display and the ready-to-win title display, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits light to notify. The common sound and light emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such shutter display and reach title display are performed, common notification for fruit patterns is executed. Also, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the common sound and the specific sound may be partially overlapped in their output periods.

FIG. 19 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display. The shutter image 31AK061 displays a fruit pattern image including all of the elements E1 to E5. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits a notification. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 19(b), variable display of decorative patterns is started. Downward arrows indicate variable display of left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left pattern and the right pattern temporarily stops, as shown in FIG. 19(c), the reach state is entered.

Then, as shown in FIG. 19(d), the super ready-to-win effect is started. For example, the variable display is displayed in a small size on the upper right side of the screen, and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the contents of the super reach to be executed from now on are displayed as a reach title display. The ready-to-win title image 31AK062 displays a fruit pattern image including all of the elements E1 to E5. Also, in the ready-to-win title image 31AK062, characters of "battle ready-to-win" are displayed to indicate that a ready-to-win effect accompanied by a battle effect is to be executed.

Further, when the ready-to-win title effect is executed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits a notification. Furthermore, after outputting the common sound, an effect is executed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) such as "Hot", which indicates that the reliability of the big win is high. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestive display to be displayed is smaller than in the shutter effect. However, in the ready-to-win title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image has been displayed. In addition, although the common sound and the specific sound have been explained in the case where the output periods are completely separated, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, a battle ready-to-win effect is executed as shown in FIG. 19(e). An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters "Battle Victory!" are displayed on the upper left of the screen. It is reported that the jackpot has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle production ends, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number patterns. As shown in FIG. 19(f), all the symbols are stopped, and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 19(a) and 19(d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 forming the fruit pattern image. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be preferably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the ready-to-win title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately convey that a fruit pattern image with a high degree of reliability for big wins has been displayed.

Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19(a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19(d). Therefore, attention can be paid to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19(a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19(d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination of the shutter effect (whether or not to use the shutter effect and the mode of effect) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. In this case, the shutter performance may be determined based on the determination result of the title display color in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the fruit pattern shutter effect may be executed more easily. Further, the determination relating to the ready-to-win title effect may also be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 15 together with the determination relating to the shutter effect.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 121IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 121IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-1 and 20-2, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 121IW001a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame, and a game board constituting a game board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a game machine frame (base frame) 121IW003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 121IW003, a glass door frame 121IW003a having a glass window is positioned around the left side between a door open position where the front surface of the game machine frame 121IW003 is opened and a door closed position where the front surface is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 121IW003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 121IW003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 121IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 121IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 121IW201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. Further, on the main board 11, a setting key 121IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later, and a setting key 121IW051 for changing set values such as a winning probability of a big hit (ball output rate), which will be described later, in the setting change state. A setting switch 121IW052 functioning as a setting switch is provided.

A setting-switching main body provided with operation units that can be operated by a player, such as the setting key 121IW051 and the setting-switching switch 121IW052, is accommodated in the board case 121IW201 together with the main board 11. The setting key 121IW051 and the setting-switching switch 121IW052 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear right portion of the substrate case 121IW201 so that operation can be performed without opening the substrate case 121IW201.

Since the substrate case 121IW201 having the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is impossible to operate from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. It is possible to operate by opening the game machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. Also, since the setting key 121IW051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like of the game arcade, only the store clerk possessing the setting key can operate it. The setting key 121IW051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later. In addition, in the characterizing portion 121IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

Further, a display monitor 121IW029 and a display changeover switch 121IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 121IW029 are arranged in the substrate case 121IW201. The display monitor 121IW029 and the display changeover switch 121IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged in the upper left part of the board case 121IW201. That is, the display monitor 121IW029 and the display changeover switch 121IW030 are arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 121IW201. Since the main board 11 cannot be viewed when the game machine frame 121IW003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 121IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 in the characteristic portion 121IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. There is a possibility that the setting key 121IW051 and the setting switch 121IW052 are operated from inside the game island where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in this characterizing portion 121IW, as shown in FIGS. 20-2 and 20-3, the right end portion of the outer frame 121IW001a includes a setting key 121IW051 and a setting changeover switch 52 when the game machine frame 121IW003 is closed. A security cover 121IW500A is attached to cover the right side of the board case 121IW201 from the rear side. The security cover 121IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member comprising a short piece 121IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 121IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 121IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko game machine 1. , and is made of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 121IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 121IW201. Security cover 121IW500A is fixed to the right end of outer frame 121IW001a via the front end of short piece 121IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 20-2, the long piece 121IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right portion of the board case 121IW201 from behind the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. Thus, the right side of the substrate case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are inoperable by the long piece 121IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-3, in the state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting switch 121IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 121IW003 to move from the long piece 121IW500Ab. By moving away, the state of covering by the long piece 121IW500Ab is released, and an operable state is obtained.

In other words, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 121IW, when the game machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the security cover 121IW500A regulates the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the restriction state by the security cover 121IW500A is canceled, and the operation of the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is permitted. state.

Since the substrate case 121IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting keys 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 when the game machine frame 121IW003 is closed. Unless the game machine frame 121IW003 is opened by a game arcade clerk or the like using the door key, the set values cannot be changed by operating the setting keys 121IW051 and the setting changeover switches 121IW052.

However, in a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a game island (not shown) of the game hall, even if the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, for example, other pachinko gaming machines adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 An unauthorized member such as a wire or a cell plate is inserted from between a game device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the pachinko game machine 1 and the setting key 121IW051 on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. or the setting changeover switch 121IW052 to change the set value. By maintaining the restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 121IW052 is restricted, the fraudulent act can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a regulated state in which the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed and the security cover 121IW500A covers the right side of the back surface of the board case 121IW201 including the setting keys 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052, the board can be opened through the transparent security cover 121IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like accommodated in the case 121IW201 can be seen through, the mounting surface of the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted and the state of sealing seals can be easily confirmed.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

In this characteristic part 121IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data representing the random number MR4 of , and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-4 and 20-5 prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in the variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 20-4(A), a display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. -4 (C) display result determination table (set value 3), in addition to the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), small hit variation pattern determination table ( Not shown), a losing variation pattern determination table shown in FIG.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic portion 121IW is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of three levels from 1 to 3, where 1 is the lowest ball payout rate, and the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2, and 3, the higher the ball payout rate is. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the lowest, and the advantage increases stepwise as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3. It should be noted that, in this characterizing section 121IW, the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the setting value.

(Display result determination table)
FIGS. 20-4A to 20-4C are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to respective setting values. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbols are subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

As shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display In this case, a jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at non-probability variation, 1/32 at probability variation) than when the set value is "2" or "3". On the other hand, some of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small wins, and winning of small wins has the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are ``2'' and ``3''. It is designed to Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the probability of winning a big hit is the same as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/320 when non-variable, 1/32 when variable). do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability (1/2) is higher than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display. It is designed to be elected.

Also, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1" Winning a big hit with a higher probability than in some cases (1/300 when non-variable, 1/30 when variable). On the other hand, some of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small wins, and the small wins are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "3". It is designed to Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/300 when non-variable, 1/30 when variable) wins the jackpot do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability is higher than the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value is "1" and "3", the same probability (1/2) as in the case of "1" and "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", Winning a jackpot with a higher probability (1/280 at non-probability variation, 1/28 at probability variation) than in the case of "2". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small wins, and the small wins are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "2". It is designed to Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the probability of winning a big hit is the same as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/280 when non-variable, 1/28 when variable). do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability is higher than the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value is "1" and "2", the same probability (1/2) of winning a small hit.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. If it matches with the hit determination value, it is determined to be a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C) with respect to the special symbol. Also, when MR1 coincides with any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 20-4(A) to (C) indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Determining whether or not to make a small win means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-4, the case is shown in which the odds of winning the small win are the same regardless of the set value, but the mode is not limited to this. For example, similar to the probability of winning a big win, the odds of winning a small win may be increased in the order of 1, 2, and 3 as the set value increases. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small win may be set to the same ratio as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big win. Specifically, if the winning probability of the small win at the setting value "1" is 1/100, the winning probability of the small win at the setting value "2" is designed to be 1/93.75, It may be set so that the winning probability of the small hit at the set value "3" is 1/87.5.

Also, in a game machine that does not provide a small hit, the configuration shown in the characteristic portion 121IW may be applied.

Further, in this characteristic portion 121IW, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIGS. A big-hit determination table and a small-hit determination table are provided separately, and the big-hit determination is made according to whether the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, regardless of the variable special symbol designating buffer. A common table may be used, and the determination of the small hit may be made using separate tables depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer is the first or the second buffer.

Further, in this characteristic portion 121IW, the case is shown in which the advantage increases in the order of setting value "1"<setting value "2"<setting value "3". may be configured to change. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability/high base state, is maintained in the high probability/high base state until the next big win occurs, and is configured so that a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained in a small win game. In this example, as shown in FIG. 20-4, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2, and a prize ball is likely to be obtained. Therefore, in a specific game state (high probability/high base state in this example), unlike other game states, a big hit is unlikely to occur (high probability/high base state is likely to continue). A value of "1" may be the setting with the highest degree of advantage.

Also, for example, when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability variation state ends based on the execution of the variable display of a predetermined number of times (the probability variation end number) after being controlled to the probability variation state (high probability state), the same probability variation If it is the number of ending times, it may be configured such that the variable probability continuation rate (continuous home rate) increases in the order of set value "1"<set value "2"<set value "3".

In addition, in this characteristic part 121IW, a total of three setting values 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 20-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In addition, in this characteristic part 121IW, when the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning hole (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed), A common jackpot type determination table is used in the case of determining the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Although configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that different percentages of jackpot types are determined.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type among jackpot types A to jackpot types C based on a random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot pattern. It is a table referred to in order to decide either.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), a determination value corresponding to a random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination is assigned to each set value. Percentages of judgment values obtained are shown. In other words, the ratio of which one of the big hit types A to C is determined for each set value is shown. It should be noted that the determination value corresponding to the random number is actually assigned to the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. For simplicity, the percentage of assigned decision values is shown.

As shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the setting value is "1", the ratio of being determined to the jackpot type C is high, and when the setting value is "2", When the percentage of the big hit type B is determined to be high and the setting value is "3", the determination value is assigned so that the percentage of the big hit type A to be determined is high.

20-5(B), in this feature section 121IW, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period in the jackpot game are defined for each jackpot type. It is

The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the big win opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the big win pattern is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12 side, the big win game state is started. This is the period in which the fanfare effect as the effect action to be notified is executed.

The interval period is, for example, a period in which the process after opening the big win in step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the round in which the big winning hole is opened on the effect control board 12 side, the next It is a period during which an interval production is executed as a production operation for notifying the start of the round.

The ending period is, for example, a period during which the big win ending process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and an ending effect as a production operation for notifying the end of the big win game state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is the period during which

As shown in FIG. 20-5(B), the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, the second in the case of the jackpot type B, and the longest in the case of the jackpot type C. set to be short.

As described above, in this characterizing section 121IW, when the setting value is "1", the ratio of determination of the jackpot type C is high, so the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determination of jackpot type A is high, so the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the average period of the ending period become longer in the order of the setting values "1"<"2"<"3".

This characterizing portion 121IW is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (percentage of winning balls) increases in the order of setting values "1"<"2"<"3". '<'2'<'3', the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period increases in the order. With such a configuration, when the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, thereby increasing gambling. can be prevented from becoming too high.

This characteristic portion 121IW is configured to be able to execute a mid-jackpot suggesting performance (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during a big-hit game. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the interest in the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be enhanced. Also, by directing the player's interest to the effect suggesting during the big win, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the length of each period.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image, etc.) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is executed in common.

In addition, in this characteristic part 121IW, a fanfare period, an interval period and an ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined for each setting value is different, thereby increasing the number of jackpots. When the probability of winning (percentage of winning balls) is set to be high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the average period of the ending period are lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. A fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table is used in which the judgment values are set so that the ratio of selecting the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period in which relatively long periods are set is high in the order of jackpot types A<B<C. By doing so, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the average period of the ending period can be lengthened in the order of the set values "1"<"2"<"3".

In this feature portion 121IW, in any of the jackpot types A to C, the time saving control and probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot game state are specified a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature portion 121IW). It ends when the figure game is executed or the jackpot game state is entered before the special game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, high-precision control and time-saving control that are executed after the jackpot game state ends are continuously executed until a jackpot occurs again after the jackpot game state ends. may be made. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, a jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, which is a so-called continuous game state. This characteristic portion 121IW is configured so that the ratio of the big hits differs for each set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability variable continuation is performed for each set value. The rate (consecutive rate) may be different.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 121IW, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between the jackpot types A to jackpot types C (for example, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence or absence of time reduction control and variable probability control, the number of times of control, etc.), fanfare period, interval The period and the average period of the ending period are configured to be different, but for each jackpot type, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence or absence of time reduction control and variable probability control, and the number of times of control are different, and the advantage is different. You may do so. In this case, the performance during the round may be different for each big win type, or may be the same regardless of the big win type.

In addition, in this characteristic part 121IW, according to the set value, the jackpot type when the variation display result is a jackpot is determined at different ratios from jackpot type A, jackpot type B, and jackpot type C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value, one or more of the jackpot types A, jackpot types B, and jackpot types C cannot be determined. There may be more than one. In other words, if the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value, it is possible to not determine one of the jackpot types (the determination ratio is 0%), or to set a specific jackpot type to 100%. Determining percentages is included.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 121IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period differ according to the jackpot type is shown, but this is not limited to such an aspect, and the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending are not limited to the jackpot type. It may be configured to have different periods. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to which of the set values "1" to "3". Further, for example, according to which of the set values "1" to "3", a lottery process is performed according to the selection probability according to the set value, and the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are determined. You may

As described above, in this characteristic part 121IW, since the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is different according to the set value, the game interest can be improved. .

In addition, in this characteristic part 121IW, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for judging the jackpot type. It may be determined using MR1, which is a random value for determination.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 121IW, the larger the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the higher the probability of a big hit or the probability of a small hit, and the easier the determination of the jackpot type C as the jackpot type). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Further, in this characteristic portion 121IW, while the jackpot probability changes according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself does not change, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the game characteristics may be changed according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 .

For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and game balls are provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. Based on passing through a predetermined count switch, the game state after the end of the big win game is controlled to a probability variable state, while the rate of the game ball passing through the count switch during the big win game differs according to the big win type. When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50. It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the middle). Furthermore, although the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are 1 to 3 and the game performance is the same, the probability of a big hit or the probability of a small hit is higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. , a setting may be provided in which the number of winning balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4).

Furthermore, in such a case where the game characteristics are changed according to the setting values, common switches may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is operated as a production switch (a game ball passes through the count switch). When the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time a game ball is played). It may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch.

(Small hit type determination table)
FIG. 20-5 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. As shown in FIG. 20-5(C), in this characterizing portion 121IW, small hit types A to C are provided as small hit types. As shown in FIG. 20-5 (C), in this characteristic portion 121IW, the determination ratio of the small hit types A to C is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "3".

In addition, in this characteristic part 121IW, the opening period and number of openings of the big winning opening during the small winning game are the same regardless of any of the small winning types A to C, and the degree of advantage in the game is the same. .

(Variation pattern determination table)
In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern is selected from among the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined result. Determine one of the fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, as a variation pattern determination table, a big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is decided in advance that the variation display result is a "big hit", and a variation display result is set to a "small hit". A small hit variation pattern determination table used when is determined in advance and a loss variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is "loss" are prepared in advance. .

(Loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 20-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a loss variation pattern determination table. In this characteristic portion 121IW, a period (hereinafter also referred to as a special period) from when the setting is changed when the power is turned on until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), and a period other than that ( Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a non-special period), and is configured to use a different loss variation pattern determination table.

Specifically, in the special period, the variation pattern is determined using the first losing variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), and in the non-special period, shown in FIG. 20-6 (B) A variation pattern is determined using the second loss variation pattern determination table. In this characteristic portion 121IW, the period from when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) is defined as the special period, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, the special period may be a period until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Also, a real-time clock or the like may be used as a special period within a predetermined time period (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). Also, the period until the first big hit occurs may be set as the special period.

20-6 (A) and (B) show the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables, both of which become normal reach loss and super reach loss in the order of set values "1" < "2" < "3" Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage is high and the percentage of non-reach failures is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, so the set value is suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are executed.

In addition, the first losing variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A) has a higher percentage of normal reach losing than the second losing variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between them increases. With such a configuration, in the special period, it becomes easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of normal reach execution than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the setting value), so the motivation to play the game during the special period can be given, and the game interest can be enhanced.

In addition, for example, the variation pattern with super reach (or a specific variation pattern thereof) is determined at the same rate regardless of the difference in the set value (or regardless of the difference between the special period and the non-special period) You may do so. By doing so, depending on the setting value, the execution ratio of only a specific variation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) will differ, and the setting value is suggested by the frequency of execution of the specific variation pattern become. In addition, conversely, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that results in super reach loss may also be varied according to the set value.

In addition, the first and second losing variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B) are either normal reach losing or super reach losing depending on the set value when other than non-reach losing. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio (that is, the balance between normal reach loss and super reach loss) is different. Specifically, in the first losing variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), the ratio of normal reach losing becomes significantly higher in the order of setting values “1” < “2” < “3” (this example Then, it increases by 5%), specifically, the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. is slightly increased (in this example, increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. In addition, it is possible to increase the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period.

In this characteristic portion 121IW, it is possible to execute setting suggestion effects at different ratios depending on the set value. It is a concept including that the execution ratio of normal reach loss and super reach loss is different depending on the set value, and that the execution ratio of only normal reach loss is different according to the set value.

In this characteristic portion 121IW, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6(A) and (B) is used. Then, the variable display of the decoration pattern is performed. Also, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, the common background image is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Note that a dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or during a period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game during the special period or the period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example).

In addition, not limited to the example of this characteristic portion 121IW, for example, a special variation pattern that suggests a set value (for example, a variation pattern in which the aspect of the variation display of the decorative pattern is different from the usual, and the set value is 1 or 2 ) may be provided so that a special variation pattern can be selected only in a special period. With such a configuration as well, it is possible to give motivation to play a game during the special period, and to increase the interest in the game.

(Non-reach loss fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 20-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a non-reach-losing variation pattern determination table. In this characteristic portion 121IW, a plurality of types of non-reach loss variation patterns with different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach loss, it is further determined to be any of non-reach loss A to C. is configured to In addition, not limited to such a configuration, for example, the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine whether

As shown in FIG. 20-7, in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table, when the setting value is "1", the ratio of being determined to be non-reach loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the setting value is "2 ”, the percentage determined to be non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high, and if the setting value is “3”, the percentage determined to be non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is higher is assigned a judgment value.

In this characteristic portion 121IW, when the set value is "1", the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, so the fluctuation time during non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, so the fluctuation time during non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of set values "1"<"2"<"3".

This characterizing portion 121IW is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (percentage of winning balls) increases in the order of setting values "1"<"2"<"3". '<'2'<'3'. With such a configuration, when the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling nature can be prevented from becoming too high. can be prevented.

In this characteristic portion 121IW, the average variation time is configured to be different by varying the ratio of which one of the non-reach loss A to C with different variation times according to the setting value. Variation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may also be provided with a plurality of types so that the variation time is different, and the selected ratio may be different according to the set value. In addition, if multiple types of fluctuation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided with different fluctuation times, the time of the swaying display of the decorative pattern and the time of high-speed fluctuation display etc. It is desirable that there is no difference in appearance.

In addition, this characteristic portion 121IW is configured so that the average fluctuation time varies depending on the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the final decorative pattern (final The period during which the stop symbol) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is set to be high, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the fixed decorative pattern (final stop pattern) is stop-displayed, that is, delay the progress of the game. , it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

In addition, in this characteristic part 121IW, the variation time is set for each of non-reach loss A to C, and the ratio of determining which of non-reach loss A to C is different for each set value, thereby winning a big hit. When the probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average variation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. may be fixedly set, and the variation time may be longer when the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is higher.

Note that this characteristic portion 121IW is provided with a shortening variation pattern having a shorter variation time than other variation patterns. For example, there is provided a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time 1.5 seconds) whose variation time is shorter than non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds). This shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the reserved storage number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (eg, 3). With such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, this state is eliminated and the variable display is performed efficiently (that is, the game can be progressed efficiently). ). Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the reserved memory number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 121IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of pending memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. It should be noted that regardless of the configuration of the characteristic portion 121IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number may also vary in variation time according to the set value.

(setting change processing)
Next, the change of the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 in this characterizing portion 121IW will be described. Figures 20-8 and 20-9 are flowcharts showing game control main processing in the characterizing section 121IW. Note that the processing of steps IWS001 to S002 in this characteristic portion 121IW is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the activation of the effect control means for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A timer is set (step 121IWS003). In this case, sufficient time is set to the effect control means startup waiting timer from when the power supply to the gaming machine is started until the effect control CPU 120 is activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 121IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 121IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 121IWS004, and the processing of steps 121IWS004 to S005 is repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 121IWS006.

By executing the processing of steps 121IWS003 to S005, after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is started, the processing after step 121IWS006 is executed, and the change and confirmation of the set value, the initialization of the RAM, the recovery processing, etc. are executed. be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a set value command, an initialization command, a command for recovery, and the like, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and a command can be omitted. can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 stores, for example, a factory-shipped setting flag indicating that the factory-shipped settings remain in the RAM 102 (for example, this flag is cleared even if RAM clear processing 1 and 2 and recovery processing described later are executed). (cleared when setting change processing described later is executed) is set, and in step 121IWS006, it is checked whether or not this factory shipment setting flag is set. do it. In addition, not limited to such an aspect, for example, a value (for example, "0" or "-") indicating that the setting value is set at the time of shipment from the factory is set. It may be confirmed whether or not is the value at the time of shipment from the factory. If the factory settings remain unchanged (step 121IWS006; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

If it is not the factory default setting (step 121IWS006; Yes), that is, if the setting value has already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as in step S4. It is determined whether or not data is saved (step 121IWS007). Specifically, at step 121IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) in the same manner as in step S5 to determine whether the data is normal. (Step 121IWS008). In step 121IWS008, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 121IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 121IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 checks whether or not a setting change flag indicating that the setting value is currently being changed is set (step 121IWS009). ). If the setting changing flag is set (step 121IWS009; No), that is, if the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted due to a power failure or the like during the setting value change, the process proceeds to step IWS010.

At step 121IWS010, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 121IWS010). Note that the CPU 103 may control the display monitor 121IW029 to display a display indicating a RAM abnormality error (for example, display of "E").

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is ON (step 121IWS011). If the output signal from door open sensor 121IW090 is ON, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 121IW051 is ON (step 121IWS012). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 121IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes RAM clear 1 processing (step 121IWS014). In RAM clear 1 processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the memory area of the RAM 102 other than the area for storing performance display information such as continuous ratio, role ratio, and base is cleared, and performance display such as continuous ratio, role ratio, and base is cleared. information is retained without being cleared. In addition, in the RAM clear 1 process, the set values stored in the RAM 102 are also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS027.

On the other hand, if the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is off (N at step 121IWS011), if the setting key 121IW051 is off (N at step 121IWS012), or if the output signal from the clear switch is off ( At step 121IWS013 N), the process does not proceed to step 121IWS014, but proceeds to loop processing.

By executing the processing of steps 121IWS006 to S014, in this characteristic part 121IW, if the backup RAM is not normal (steps 121IWS007, N of S008), or if the settings for factory shipment remain unchanged (step 121IWS006 Y), if power failure or the like occurs during the setting change (step 121IWS009 Y), the setting key 121IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the game machine frame 121IW003 opened. On this condition, the RAM is cleared, and the setting values after step 121IWS027 can be changed. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened and the setting key 121IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 121IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 121IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is ON (step 121IWS016). If the output signal from door open sensor 121IW090 is ON, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 121IW051 is ON (step 121IWS017). If the setting key 121IW051 is ON, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation process start command indicating to start the setting confirmation process to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS018).

On the effect control board 12 side, when the setting confirmation process start command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R). or emit a decorative luminous body such as a decorative LED in a predetermined manner). In this case, when an operation button for effect such as the push button 31B is pressed on the effect control board 12 side, "maintenance mode" or the like may be displayed to shift to the maintenance mode. "Maintenance mode" includes, for example, real-time clock date and time settings, various error history (a record of when and what errors occurred), and setting change history (when the set value was changed and after the change). This mode allows you to check the recording of set values. When the setting key 121IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode is also terminated.

Next, the CPU 103 executes setting confirmation processing (step 121IWS019).

After completing the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 121IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time when the power supply was stopped, by the same process as in step S6. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation process end command indicating that the setting confirmation process has ended to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

On the other hand, if the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is not ON (N at step 121IWS016) or if the setting key 121IW051 is not ON (N at step 121IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as in step S6. Then, a recovery process (step 121IWS022) is performed to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 by the process similar to step S7 (step 121IWS023). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes RAM clear 2 processing (step 121IWS024). In RAM clear 2 processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the memory area of the RAM 102 other than the area for storing performance display information such as continuous ratio, role ratio, and base, and the area for storing setting values is cleared. Performance display information such as role ratios and bases, and set value information are retained without being cleared.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is ON (step 121IWS025). If the output signal from door open sensor 121IW090 is ON, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 121IW051 is ON (step 121IWS026). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets a setting changing flag (step 121IWS027).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change process start command indicating to start the setting change process to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS028). On the effect control board 12 side, when the setting change processing start command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R). or emit a decorative luminous body such as a decorative LED in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes setting change processing (step 121IWS029).

After completing the setting change process, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 121IWS030). Also, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS031). Also, a setting change process end command indicating that the setting change process has ended is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

On the other hand, if the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is not ON (N at step 121IWS025) or if the setting key 121IW051 is not ON (N at step 121IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as in step S9. , the effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

In this characterizing portion 121IW, the processing of steps IWS034 to S036 is the same as the processing of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

Next, the setting confirmation process (step 121IWS019) will be described. FIG. 20-10(A) is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation process (step 121IWS019).

In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 first identifies the set values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the identified set values on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSA01).

Next, CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from setting key 121IW051 is ON (step 121IWSA02). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSA03). If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is ON, the process proceeds to step 121IWSA02 and repeats the processing of steps 121IWSA02 to SA03. That is, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open and the setting key 121IW051 is on.

If the output signal from door opening sensor 121IW090 is not ON, CPU 103 executes setting confirmation error processing (step 121IWSA04). After that, the process shifts to loop processing. In addition, in step 121IWSA04, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating a setting confirmation error, and the setting confirmation error notification may be executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the command. good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may notify the error by turning on an error LED on a circuit board mounted on the gaming machine. Also, in this example, when the setting confirmation error process is executed, the error state is continued until the power is turned on again, and the process is prevented from proceeding by shifting to the loop process.

If the setting key 121IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSA05). If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is ON, the process of step 121IWSA05 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is not ON (that is, if the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed), the setting confirmation process is terminated.

Next, the setting change process (step 121IWS029) will be described. FIG. 20-10B is a flow chart showing the setting change process (step 121IWS029).

In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the identified setting values on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSB01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting switch 121IW052 is ON (step 121IWSB02). If the output signal from the setting switch 121IW052 is not ON, the process proceeds to step 121IWSB05. If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is ON (Y in step 121IWSB02), the CPU 103 updates the setting value displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSB03). For example, when "1" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 121IW029, the display of the display monitor 121IW029 is updated to "2", and when "2" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 121IW029 , the display on the display monitor 121IW029 is updated to "3", and if "3" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 121IW029, the display on the display monitor 121IW029 is updated to "1". Further, the CPU 103 stores the setting value (the setting value after updating) displayed on the display monitor 121IW0029 in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updating the setting value already stored) (step 121IWSB04).

Next, CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from setting key 121IW051 is ON (step 121IWSB05). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSB06). If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is ON, the process proceeds to step 121IWSB02 and repeats the processing of steps 121IWSB02 to SB06. That is, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open and the setting key 121IW051 is on, the processes of steps 121IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed.

If the output signal from door open sensor 121IW090 is not ON, CPU 103 executes setting change error processing (step 121IWSB07). After that, the process shifts to loop processing. In addition, in step 121IWSB07, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating a setting change error, and the setting change error notification may be executed based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the command. good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may notify the error by turning on an error LED on a circuit board mounted on the gaming machine. Also, in this example, when the setting change error process is executed, the error state continues until the power is turned on again, and the process is prevented from proceeding by shifting to the loop process. In this case, since the setting change flag remains set at step 121IWS027, the RAM clear 1 process is executed after the power is turned on again (Y at step 121IWS009, see 121IWS014). The error state will be cleared.

If the setting key 121IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSB08). If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is ON, the process of step 121IWSB08 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is not ON (that is, if the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is in the closed state), the setting change process is terminated.

FIG. 20-11 is an explanatory diagram showing the processing executed when the power is turned on. In this characteristic portion 121IW, as shown in FIG. 20-11, when the setting key 121IW051 is on when the power is turned on (and when the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, setting change processing (step 121IWS029) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, setting confirmation processing (steps 121IWS015 to S017) is executed. If the setting key 121IW051 is turned off when the power is turned on, initialization processing (step S8) is executed if the clear switch is turned on, and recovery processing (step S6) is executed if the clear switch is turned off. executed.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 121IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-12(A) and 20-12(B), when the power is turned off (powered off) by the operation of a game hall clerk or the like, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. The display on the display monitor 121IW029 ends when the supply stops. If the big winning opening is open during the big winning game or the small winning game at the timing of turning off the power, the big winning opening is closed by stopping the power supply to the solenoid 82 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12(C), when the game arcade clerk or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (if Yes in step S3 of the game control main processing), the setting key 121IW051 is turned ON. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that it is, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029.

In this state in which the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 121IW029, as shown in FIG. Numerical values displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 are sequentially updated (for example, updated in the order of 1→2→3→1→ . . . each time the setting switch 121IW052 is operated). Also, the set values displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 are stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12(E), the CPU 103 blinks the display monitor 121IW029 based on the fact that the setting key 121IW051 has been turned off by the operation of the game hall clerk or the like, so that the game hall clerk or the like that the new set values have been stored in the backup area of the RAM 102.

Also, if the reserve memory is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserve memory is cleared. Also, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 20-12(A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory related to the big win is erased, the big prize opening remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 ends the setting change processing, and enters a state in which a game can be performed, that is, a state in which a variation display result, a jackpot type, a lottery for determination of a variation pattern, payout of prize balls, and the like can be executed.

In addition, in the setting change processing in this characterizing portion 121IW, as an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 121IW029, a mode of displaying the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. As an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 in the setting change process, the most disadvantageous setting value for the player ("1" in the case of this characteristic portion 121IW) or the most advantageous setting value for the player. A set value (“3” for the characteristic portion 121IW) may be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 20-12, the setting value is displayed using the first display of the four-digit display of the display monitor 121IW029 when confirming or changing the setting value. For example, the setting values may be displayed using the second and subsequent displays of the display monitor 121IW029. Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed by performing a dedicated 4-digit display on the display monitor 121IW029. In this case, for example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 121IW029 displays "-S-1" in four digits, and if the set value is "2", the display monitor 121IW029 displays "-S-2". , or if the set value is "3", the display monitor 121IW029 may display "-S-3" in four digits. Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed on all four digits of the display monitor 121IW029. For example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 121IW029 displays 4 digits "1111", and if the set value is "2", the display monitor 121IW029 displays 4 digits "2222". may

(Special pattern normal processing)
Next, the processing of the special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the present characterizing portion 121IW will be described. FIGS. 20-13 and 20-14 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total reserved memory number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) (step 121IWS101). For example, it checks the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number.

If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 121IWS 102). For example, it is checked whether the count value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is 0 or not. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). is set with data indicating "second" (step 121 IWS 103). If the second reserved memory number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (step 121IWS104).

By executing the processing of steps 121IWS102 to S104, in this characterizing section 121IW, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, not limited to such a mode, for example, according to the starting winning order in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol and may be configured to execute

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 121IWS105). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=1 in the first reserved storage buffer is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 .

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 121IWS106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the number of storage areas in the first reserved storage buffer Shift content. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved storage number counter, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103, in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, saves the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) Each stored random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n−1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reservation storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reservation storage buffer of the RAM 102 Store the random value in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or 2nd reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step 121IWS107). Note that the CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 .

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS108). As already explained, in this characteristic unit 112, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed at power-on by executing the process of step 121IWS031. A set value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of 121IWS 108 .

Even if the same variation pattern is used, if the configuration is such that a different variation pattern command is sent for each set value, variation pattern commands for the total number of variation patterns x the number of set values (3 in this example) are required. As a result, the data capacity may increase. Therefore, for example, a set value command is transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only the variation pattern command corresponding to the specific variation pattern is provided with the variation pattern command for the number of set values. good. In this case, for example, the set value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation with the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation is the fluctuation pattern command for the number of set values may be provided.

In this example, the same set value command is sent as the set value command (see step 121IWS031) when the power is turned on and the set value command when fluctuation starts (see step 121IWS108). It is not limited to any form. For example, a set value command for when power is turned on and a set value command for when fluctuation starts may be configured as separate commands so that different set value commands are sent when power is turned on and when fluctuation starts. good.

Also, in this example, a case is shown in which the set value command is transmitted separately from the variation pattern command at the start of variation. good too. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, if the set value is "1", the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the set value is "2" A variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and if the set value is "3", a variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

In addition, regardless of the setting value on the game control microcomputer 100 side, the same variation pattern command (for example, variation pattern command A) can be configured to be output, and depending on which setting value is on the effect control CPU 120 side It may be configured such that which variation pattern is selected or the selection ratio is varied. For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, or if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is high Alternatively, if the set value is 3, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high percentage. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 have the same variation time, but may differ in the presence/absence of pseudo-runs, the number of pseudo-runs, and the presence/absence and type of reach. Further, in this case, for example, when the setting value command cannot be received normally, the variation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the setting value command is not normally received, the selection ratio dedicated to may be configured to select a variation pattern with .

Also, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of fluctuation has been shown, but the configuration is not limited to such a mode, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of fluctuation.

Further, the CPU 103 performs control for transmitting a background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current game state (step 121IWS109). In this case, the CPU 103, for example, performs control to transmit the probability variable state background designation command in the case of the probability variable state, and performs control to transmit the time reduction state background designation command in the case of the time saving state, and is in the normal state In this case, control is performed to send a normal state background designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination from the random number buffer area, and executes the big hit determination module. The big hit determination module compares a predetermined big hit determination value or small hit determination value (see FIG. 20-4) with the random number MR1, and if they match, determines a big hit or a small hit. is the program to run. That is, it is a program for executing the processing of big hit determination and small hit determination.

If the value of the random number MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N of step 121IWS110), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (step 121IWS111). Then, when it is determined to be a small win (Y in step 121IWS111), the CPU 103 sets a small win flag indicating a small win (step 121IWS112), and proceeds to step 121IWS116.

If the value of the random number MR1 does not match either the big-hit determination value or the small-hit determination value (N in step 121IWS111), that is, if it is a loss, the process proceeds directly to step 121IWS116.

If the value of the random number MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 121 IWS110), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 20-5) to determine the type ("jackpot type A , "jackpot type B" or "jackpot type C") is determined as the jackpot type (step 121IWS 114).

Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS 115). For example, when the jackpot type is "jackpot type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "jackpot type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is "jackpot type C", "03" is set as data indicating the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 121IWS116). For example, when neither the big-hit flag nor the small-hit flag is set, the winning symbol "-" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the big hit flag is set, the big hit symbol "7" is determined as the special symbol stop symbol. It should be noted that a different special symbol stop symbol may be determined according to the type of the big hit. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 121IWS117).

(Production mode change processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in this characterizing portion 121IW will be described. FIG. 20-15 is a flow chart showing part of the effect control main processing in the characterizing section 121IW. In this characteristic part 121IW, in the production control main process, the production control CPU 120 executes the production control random number update process of step S77, and then executes the production mode change process for changing the production mode (step 121IWS201). It returns to the process of step S73.

In this characteristic part 121IW, it is possible to control three types of production modes, production mode A to production mode C, and depending on which production mode is controlled, for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 is different, The types of characters appearing in the advance notice effect and reach effect are different. In the effect mode change process of step 121 IWS 201, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is established. For example, when a real-time clock is mounted on the performance control board 12, the performance mode may be changed based on the date and time information from the real-time clock when a predetermined day or time comes. Further, for example, a lottery process based on random numbers may be executed, and the effect mode may be changed based on the decision to change the effect mode.

In step 121IW201, when the effect mode is changed, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, set a flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change and reset a flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change. For example, when the effect mode is changed to A, the effect mode A flag is set, and the effect mode B flag or effect mode C flag before the change is reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode is changed to B, the effect mode B flag may be set, and the effect mode A flag or effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Also, for example, when the effect mode is changed to C, the effect mode C flag is set, and the effect mode A flag or effect mode B flag before the change is reset.

The method of changing the production mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as production mode A → production mode B → production mode C → production mode A → . Modes A to C may be changed at random.

(Command analysis processing)

20-16 to 20-18 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main substrate 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 confirms the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 121IWS301). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. The case where the two match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the command reception buffer stores the reception command, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 121IWS302). After reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 121IWS303). The reason for incrementing by 2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 121IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 121IWS305). Also, the effect control CPU 120 sets a setting value command reception flag indicating that the setting value command has been normally received at least once after the game machine is powered on (step 121IWS306).

In addition, in this characteristic portion 121IW, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up by power, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area are stored in the power supply to the gaming machine. cleared when the is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, no setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122, and the processing is started with the setting value command reception flag cleared. be. Since the performance control board 12 side is started in a state in which the set value is not stored, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command even when the setting confirmation process or the recovery process is executed. so that the set value command is always transmitted when the power is turned on.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 121IW, a setting value command is transmitted when the game machine is powered on and setting change processing is performed. If it cannot be received at this point, the process of step 121 IWS 305 is not executed, and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in this characteristic part 121IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each variable display, so the processing of step 121IWS 305 is executed based on the set value command received thereafter. It can be executed and the setting value can be stored in the setting value storage area.

Also, even if the setting value command is received, the setting value included in the setting value command may be an abnormal value. It may be configured to determine whether or not the included set value is a normal value. For example, in this example, the setting value is configured to be set to any value from "1" to "3", but includes values such as "5" and "10" that should not be set. It may be configured to determine that the setting value included in the setting value command is abnormal when the setting value command contains the setting value. Also, for example, on the effect control CPU 120 side, the setting value indicated by the received setting value command is stored, and after that, when a new setting value command is received, the newly received setting value command It may be configured such that when the indicated set value and the previously stored set value do not match, it is determined that an inconsistency has occurred and that there is an abnormality. Even when it is determined that the setting value included in the setting value command is an abnormal value, the effect is restricted according to the processing method shown in the characteristic part 121IW assuming that the setting value command has not been received normally. It may be configured to

(Initial roll setting)
In this characteristic part 121IW, when any one of the initialization designation command, the recovery command, the setting change processing end command, and the setting confirmation processing end command is received from the main board 11 in the command analysis processing on the effect control board 12 side , in the image display device 5, control to display a predetermined initial number (specifically, a combination of decorative symbols, which is displayed in the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started). Perform (hereinafter also referred to as initial appearance effect).

If the received effect control command is the setting change process end command (step 121IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 121IWS308). If the setting value command reception flag is set (that is, when the setting change process is executed and the setting value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122. Based on the set values, using the initial figure determination table, even number initial figures (for example, "246", "224", etc.), which are combinations of even number ornament symbols, and odd number ornament symbols are combined. Either a certain odd initial outcome (for example, "135" or "113") or a special initial outcome that is a combination of decorative symbols including a special symbol (eg, a star symbol) is determined (step 121IWS309). . Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS314.

FIG. 20-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the initial payout decision table. In step 121, the IWS 309 performs lottery processing based on random numbers according to the allocation of determination values according to the set values stored in the set value storage area, using the initial outcome determination table shown in FIG. determine the outcome. In the initial outcome determination table shown in FIG. 20-19(A), the percentage of odd initial outcomes determined increases in the order of set values "1"<"2"<"3". Therefore, if the odd initial outcome is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, it means that the setting has been changed and the set value is more advantageous than the case where the even initial outcome is displayed. It will be suggested that it is set to Also, as shown in FIG. 20-19(A), there are cases where a special initial roll is determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, it is determined that the setting has been changed and the set value is "3". With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the state of the pachinko game machine 1 before the start of the game, to give the player a motivation to start the game from an early time zone of the business hours of the game parlor, and to enhance the interest.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to reasons such as missing commands or garbled data), effect control The CPU 120 checks whether the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 121IWS310). Incidentally, whether or not it is the production mode A can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. If the effect mode is A, the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the set value is "1" and determines the initial outcome using the initial outcome determination table shown in FIG. ). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS314.

By executing the processing of steps 121IWS310 to S311, in this characterizing section 121IW, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode is A, the setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting The initial roll is determined to be "1". As shown in FIG. 20-19(A), with respect to the set value "1", the ratio of odd initial rolls is the lowest, and there are no special initial rolls. Such a configuration reduces the situation in which the player is rather discouraged by displaying odd-numbered initial numbers or special initial numbers in spite of the fact that disadvantageous set values are set, thereby making the player more interested in the game. It is possible to prevent the decline of

If it is not the production mode A, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the current production mode is the production mode C (step 121IWS312). It should be noted that whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial outcome using the initial effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 121IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS314.

20-19(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial outcome determination table for effect mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 20-19(B), in the initial outcome determination table for the effect mode C, odd initial outcomes are determined as compared with the setting value "3", which is the most advantageous for the player. The percentage is low, and there are no cases where it is determined as a special initial roll.

By executing the processing of steps 121IWS312 to S313, in this characterizing section 121IW, if the setting value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode is C, a disadvantageous setting value is set. To reduce a situation in which a player is rather discouraged by displaying an odd-numbered initial outcome or a special initial outcome in spite of the presence of the player, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial numbers determined in steps 121IWS309, S311 and S313 (step 121IWS314).

On the other hand, if it is not the production mode C (that is, if the current production mode is the production mode B), the production control CPU 120 determines the initial appearance to be an even initial appearance, and the image display device 5 In step 121, IWS 315 controls to display even initial numbers.

By executing the process of step 121IWS315, this characterizing section 121IW uniformly displays an even-numbered initial outcome when the set value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is B. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the player is rather discouraged by displaying odd initial results or special initial results in spite of the fact that disadvantageous set values are set, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

Even if the set value command is not normally received in the performance mode B, the odd initial appearing symbols may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the determination ratio of odd-numbered initial winning symbols is set lower than the set value "1" of the initial winning determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine the eye design.

In addition, in this example, when the set value command could not be received normally and in the case of the production mode B, the case of uniformly displaying even initial numbers was shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. . For example, when the set value command cannot be received normally and in the case of the production mode B, when the set value command cannot be received normally, such as a combination of “???” symbols as the initial outcome. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial roll. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest a setting value at all in some form may be displayed as an initial outcome.

Further, the processing when the setting value command cannot be received normally (or when the setting value cannot be stored normally) is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when the result of step 121IWS 308 is N, the set value "1" may be stored in the set value storage area as a default to determine the initial outcome. Also, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value "4") indicating that the setting value command could not be received normally is stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial output. good too.

If the received effect control command is any of the initialization designation command, the command at the time of restoration and the setting confirmation process end command (step 121IWS316), that is, when the setting change process is not executed, the effect control CPU 120 , the initial outcome is determined as an even initial outcome, and the image display device 5 is controlled to display an even initial outcome (step 121IWS317). In this characteristic portion 121IW, when the setting change process is not executed, the initial outcome is determined to be an even initial outcome, and is not determined to be an odd initial outcome. It may be decided to be either a roll or an odd initial roll. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

If the received effect control command is a RAM abnormality error notification command (step 121IWS318), the effect control CPU 120 executes RAM error notification (step 121IWS319). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character display such as "A RAM error has occurred" on the image display device 5, or outputs a sound indicating a RAM error abnormality or an error sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Also, the game effect lamp 9 and the LED are controlled to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the RAM error abnormality is notified, the loudspeakers 8L and 8R output a sound with the maximum volume or an error sound, or the game effect lamp 9 or the LED emits light at maximum brightness (for example, in the case of a full-color LED white light).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (effect control command specifying a variation pattern) (step 121IWS320), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command stored in the RAM. store in the area (step 121IWS321). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 121IWS322).

If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (whether a big hit or a small hit, a big hit type, or a small hit type is specified) (step 121IWS323), for effect control The CPU 120 stores the received display result specifying command in the display result specifying command storage area formed in the RAM (step 121IWS324).

If the received effect control command is a pattern confirmation designation command (effect control command specifying that the stop pattern of the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed) (step 121IWS325), the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag ( step 121 IWS 326).

If the received production control command is a jackpot start designation command (production control command designating the start of a jackpot game) (step 121IWS327), the production control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 121IWS328).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (effect control command for designating the end of the jackpot game) (step 121IWS329), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 121IWS330).

Whether the received effect control command is a symbol designation command (whether or not it becomes a big hit or a small hit determined in advance in the start winning judgment process (see step S101), the judgment result of the big hit type and the small hit type is specified. effect control command) (step 121IWS331), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received pattern designation command in the first vacant storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM ( step 121 IWS 332).

If the received effect control command is a variable category command (a effect control command that specifies the determination result of the variable category (variation pattern type or variation pattern) prefetched in the start winning judgment process (see step S101)) (step 121 IWS 333 ), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variable category command in the storage area where the latest symbol designation command is stored among the storage areas of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step 121IWS334).

If the received production control command is the first reserved storage number addition designation command (step 121IWS335), the production control CPU 120 receives the first reservation storage number addition designation command, the start winning time command formed in the RAM It is stored in the storage area in which the latest design designation command and variation category command are stored in each storage area of the storage area (step 121IWS336). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 increases the reserved display by one in the first reserved memory display area of the image display device 5, and updates the first reserved memory number display (step 121IWS337). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area (step 121IWS338).

If the received production control command is the second reserved memory number addition designation command (step 121IWS339), the production control CPU 120 receives the second reservation memory number addition designation command, the start winning time command formed in the RAM Store in the storage area storing the latest design designation command and variation category command among the storage areas (step 121IWS340). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 increases the reserved display by one in the second reserved memory display area of the image display device 5, and updates the second reserved memory number display (step 121IWS341). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number saving area (step 121IWS342).

If the received production control command is the first reserved storage number subtraction command (step 121IWS343), the production control CPU 120 erases one reserved display in the first reserved storage display area of the image display device 5, and the remaining Shift the pending display by one to update the first pending storage count display (step 121 IWS 344). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area (step 121IWS345).

If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step 121IWS346), the effect control CPU120 erases one reserved display in the second reserved memory display area of the image display device 5, the remaining The pending display is shifted by one to update the second pending storage count display (step 121IWS347). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number saving area (step 121IWS348).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 121IWS349). Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS301.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 121IW, when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on, the initial odd numbers are not displayed. good. Also in this case, the percentage determined for odd-numbered initial results may differ according to the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

Further, for example, instead of or in addition to an odd initial outcome or an even initial outcome, an initial outcome that denies the possibility of being a specific set value It is also possible to provide an initial result that confirms that the value is 2 or set value 3) or that that a specific set value is set, and display them according to the set value. For example, in the case of setting value 1, by not determining a specific initial result, when a specific initial result is displayed, the possibility of setting value 1 is denied, and setting value 2 or The set value 3 is determined. Also, for example, by setting a specific initial outcome to be determined only in the case of the set value of 3, the set value of 3 is determined when the specified initial outcome is displayed. . Further, when determining the initial outcome, any one of these initial outcomes may be determined by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion production)
This characteristic portion 121IW is configured to be able to change the set value, and as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value, the pre-game suggestion effect executed before the game starts, the above-mentioned initial appearance effect, and during the game (for example, , during the variable display of decorative patterns), the setting suggestion based on the above-described determination tendency of the variation pattern, and the big hit suggesting performance performed during the big win (for example, during the big win game). It is In addition, in this characteristic portion 121IW, the pre-game suggestive effect, the during-game suggestive effect, and the during-the-big-hit suggestive effect can be executed in a plurality of types of effect modes with different degrees of reliability of suggestion. The reliability of the suggestion may differ for each. For example, the reliability of the suggestions may be increased in the order of pre-game suggestive performance > mid-jackpot suggestive performance > mid-game suggestive performance, or pre-game suggestive performance > mid-game suggestive performance > mid-jackpot suggestive performance, The reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of suggesting effect during game>suggesting effect during big win> suggesting effect before game, or in the order of suggesting effect during big win>suggesting effect during game>suggesting effect before game. Further, it may be configured such that the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect can be set. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestive effects (for example, pre-game suggestive effects and initial appearance effects suggesting that the setting has been changed), or the execution rate The setting may be changed so as to lower (or raise) the . For example, after the power is turned on, a setting screen is displayed, and by operating operating means such as the push button 31B or operating means such as a switch provided inside the game machine (only the administrator can operate), settings related to the setting suggestion effect can be made. may be changed.

(Prefetching notice setting processing)
In addition, in this characteristic part 121IW, in addition to the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestive effect, the during-game suggestive effect, and the jackpot-in-progress suggestive effect, the effect that can suggest the set value is the look-ahead zone effect, the suggestive effect during the reach, and the effect stage. It is possible to execute the production by changing the

FIG. 20-20 is a flowchart showing the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not a new command for one set of starting winnings has been received (step 121IWS401). Specifically, a set of symbol designation commands, variable category commands, and reserve memory number addition designation commands (first reserve memory number addition designation command or second reserve memory number addition designation command) are stored in the start winning command storage area. It can be confirmed by determining whether or not it is newly stored. If the command for one set of start winning has not been newly received, the process is terminated as it is.

If a command for one set of start winning has been newly received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a new start winning to the first start winning port has occurred (step 121 IWS 402). . Whether or not the start winning to the first start winning opening has occurred is specifically whether or not the newly received reserved memory number addition designation command is the first reserved memory number addition designation command. This can be confirmed by determining whether If it is not the case that the start winning to the first start winning opening occurs (that is, if the starting winning to the second start winning opening occurs), the process is terminated as it is.

If the start winning to the first start winning opening occurs, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first reserved memory number is 2 or more (step 121IWS403). If the first reserved memory number is not 2 or more (that is, if the first reserved memory number is 1), the process is terminated.

In this example, by executing the processes of steps IWS402 and S403, the look-ahead zone effect may be executed only when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed twice or more. Although the case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the look-ahead zone effect can be executed, or even if the variable display is performed only once after the start winning, the look-ahead zone effect is executed. It may be configured as possible.

If the first reserved storage number is 2 or more, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not a look-ahead zone effect running flag indicating that the look-ahead zone effect is being executed is set (step 121IWS404). If the look-ahead zone effect in-execution flag is set (that is, if the look-ahead zone effect is already being executed), the process ends. By executing the process of step 121 IWS404, in this example, when the look-ahead zone effect is already being executed, the look-ahead zone effect is not redundantly determined.

If the look-ahead zone effect in-execution flag is not set (that is, if the look-ahead zone effect is not being executed), the effect control CPU 120 outputs the first pattern designation command stored in the start winning command storage area. All the symbol designation commands (all the symbol designation commands stored in association with the first reserved memory number addition designation command) based on the winning to the starting prize opening are extracted (step 121IWS405).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not there is one among the extracted symbol designation commands indicating that the result of the prefetch determination is a big hit (step 121IWS406). If there is a big hit (that is, if there is a big hit in the first reservation storage), the effect control CPU 120 creates a big win look-ahead zone as a table for determining whether or not there is a look-ahead zone effect. A performance determination table is selected (step 121IWS407). If there is no big hit (that is, if there is no big hit in the first reservation storage), the effect control CPU 120 stores a prefetch zone for losing as a table for determining whether or not there is a prefetch zone effect. A performance determination table is selected (step 121IWS408). Then, the effect control CPU 120 uses the selected look-ahead zone effect determination table to perform lottery processing based on random numbers, and determines the presence or absence of a look-ahead zone effect (step 121IWS409).

20-21 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the look-ahead zone effect determination table. Among them, FIG. 20-21(A) shows a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect determination table for big win. Also, FIG. 20-21(B) shows a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect determination table for losing. As shown in FIG. 20-21, in this example, if there is a jackpot in the first reserved memory, it is decided to execute the look-ahead zone effect with a probability of 70%. If there is no jackpot among them, it is decided to execute the look-ahead zone performance with a probability of 1%.

In this example, the case where the execution ratio of the look-ahead zone effect is changed according to whether the game is a big hit or not has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured such that the execution ratio of the look-ahead zone effect is varied according to the presence or absence and type of super reach. Further, for example, the execution ratio of the look-ahead zone effect may be changed according to the presence or absence of a pseudo-run and the number of pseudo-runs.

When it is determined to execute the look-ahead zone effect (Y in step 121IWS410), the effect control CPU 120 sets a flag during execution of the look-ahead zone effect (step 121IWS411). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 clears the value of the look-ahead zone effect count counter for counting the number of times the look-ahead zone effect is executed (step 121IWS412). It should be noted that the look-ahead zone effect execution flag set at step 121IWS411 is reset when a big hit occurs, and the look-ahead zone effect is terminated. Further, in this example, if no big hit occurs even if the variable display is performed four times (when the value of the look-ahead zone effect count counter becomes 4), when the variable display is terminated. At this time, the look-ahead zone effect execution flag is reset, and the look-ahead zone effect is terminated.

By executing the above process, the present characterizing section 121IW may decide to execute the look-ahead zone effect when a new start winning is generated. Then, when execution of the look-ahead zone effect is determined, the look-ahead zone effect is started when the first variable display is started, and when a big hit occurs in the second to fourth variable displays, the set value " 1” to “3”.

In this example, the presence or absence of the look-ahead zone effect is determined based on the look-ahead determination result indicated by the design designation command, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the presence or absence of the look-ahead zone effect may be determined based on the look-ahead determination result (for example, whether super reach or not) indicated by the variable category command.

In this example, when execution of the look-ahead zone effect is determined, the look-ahead zone effect is uniformly started when the first variable display is started. can't For example, a plurality of timings may be provided as start timings of the look-ahead zone effect. In this case, for example, in the pre-reading notice setting process, when execution of the pre-reading zone effect is determined, further, the start timing of the pre-reading zone effect is set to the first variation, the second variation, or the third variation. It may be configured to determine and start the look-ahead zone effect from the determined start timing.

(variable display start waiting process)
FIGS. 20-22 are flowcharts showing an example of variable display start waiting processing. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 121IWS501).

When the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the customer waiting demonstration effect if it is being executed (step 121IWS502, step 121IWS503). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step 121IWS504), the effect process flag value is updated to "1" (step 121IWS505), and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

If the variation pattern command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the result of time measurement by the time measuring means meets a predetermined condition unless the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed (N in step 121 IWS506). (step 121IWS507). At step 121 IWS 507, for example, when the timer (for example, set for 30 seconds) that was set when the previous variable display (display result "no") was terminated times out, it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. Also, when the timer is not set (that is, when the variable display has not been executed even once after the power is turned on and before the game is started), it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. That is, when a predetermined period of time has passed without the variable display being executed (and when the jackpot game state is not controlled), or before the start of the game, a predetermined condition is established, and a customer waiting demonstration effect is performed by the processing described later. will be executed.

If the result of time measurement by the time measurement means meets a predetermined condition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations after power-on is 0 (step 121IWS508). That is, at step 121IWS508, it is checked whether the game has not yet started.

If the number of fluctuations after power-on is 0 times, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the setting value command reception flag is set (step 121IWS509). If the setting value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122, Using the pre-game suggestive effect determination table, whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestive effect and the effect mode in the case of execution are determined according to the set value (step 121IWS510). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS515.

In this characteristic portion 121IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect including the pre-game suggestive effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decoration lamp is changed to the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demonstration effect including the pre-game suggestive effect of the second effect mode is executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the second special color (red) to perform the pre-game suggestive effect of the third effect mode. When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including is executed, the decoration lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

20-23 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a pre-game suggestive effect determination table. At step 121 IWS510, a lottery process based on random numbers is performed according to allocation of determination values according to the set values stored in the set value storage area using the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23(A). Whether or not to execute a pre-game suggestive effect and the mode of effect are determined. In the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23(A), determination values are assigned in the order of setting values "1"<"2"<"3" so that the ratio of execution of the pre-game suggestive effect increases. It is In addition, determination values are assigned so that the ratio of determination to the second effect mode increases in the order of setting values "1"<"2"<"3". With such a configuration, it is suggested that the set value is set to be advantageous by executing the pre-game suggesting effect and executing it in the second effect mode rather than in the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. Also, as shown in FIG. 20-23(A), the third effect mode may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting has been changed and the set value is "3".

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to reasons such as missing commands or garbled data), effect control The CPU 120 checks whether the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 121IWS511). Incidentally, whether or not it is the production mode A can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. If the effect mode is A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pre-game suggestive effect is executed using the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. And the mode of presentation is determined (step 121IWS512). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS515.

By executing the processing of steps 121IWS511 to S512, in this characterizing section 121IW, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode is A, the setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting Whether or not the pre-game suggestive effect is to be executed and the effect mode are determined as "1". As shown in FIG. 20-23(A), with respect to the set value "1", the rate of determination of the second rendering mode is the lowest, and there are no cases of determination of the third rendering mode. Such a configuration reduces the situation in which the pre-game suggestion performance is executed in the second performance mode or the third performance mode despite the disadvantageous set value being set, and the player is rather discouraged. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest in the game.

If it is not the production mode A, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the current production mode is the production mode C (step 121IWS513). It should be noted that whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set. If the effect mode is C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestive effect and the effect mode (step 121IWS514). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS515.

20-23(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 20-23(B), in the pre-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C, it is determined to execute the pre-game suggestive effect compared to the case of the set value "2" or "3". The percentage of the performance mode itself is low, the percentage of determination of the first rendering mode and the second rendering mode is low, and the third rendering mode is not determined.

By executing the processing of steps 121IWS513 to S514, in this characterizing section 121IW, if the set value command could not be received normally and the effect mode is C, a disadvantageous set value is set. To reduce a situation in which a pre-game suggesting performance is executed by a second performance mode or a third performance mode in spite of the fact that a player is present and disappoint a player instead, and to prevent a decrease in interest in a game.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect including the pre-game suggestive effect determined in steps 121IWS510, S512 and S514 (step 121IWS515). After that, the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is not the production mode C (that is, if the current production mode is the production mode B), the production control CPU 120 proceeds directly to step 121IWS516. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestive effect is restricted so as not to be executed.

By executing the process of step 121IWS513, this characteristic part 121IW does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect when the set value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode is B, To reduce a situation in which a pre-game suggesting performance is executed in spite of setting a disadvantageous set value and instead disappoint a player, and to prevent a decrease in interest in a game.

Even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the pre-game suggestive effect may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the execution ratio of the pre-game suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value "1" of the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured so as to determine the presence or absence and type of the suggestive effect.

20-23(A), only a specific rendering mode (for example, the second rendering mode) among the plurality of rendering modes may be executed at a different rate according to the set value. can be

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of being a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the set value 1, by not determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode), when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, the setting The possibility of being value 1 is denied, and setting value 2 or setting value 3 is determined. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, a specific set value may be determined. For example, only when the set value is 3, the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is determined, so that when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, The set value 3 is determined.

In this characteristic portion 121IW, the pre-game suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values. 3 production modes) are different, the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode and the third production mode are different according to the set value, only the specific production mode according to the set value This is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

It should be noted that this characterizing portion 121IW is configured not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect if the setting has not been changed and the set value command has not yet been received when the power is turned on. Not limited to this, the pre-game suggesting effect may be executed even when the settings are not changed. In this case, whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode in the case of execution may be determined at different rates depending on when the setting change is performed and when it is not performed.

For example, FIG. 20-23(C) is a pre-game suggestive effect determination table that is used when a recovery command is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23(A) with the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. When it is not performed, the ratio of execution of the pre-game suggestive effect is lower than when the setting is changed, and the difference in the execution ratio between the set values is also small. By doing so, the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestion effect can be made different between when the setting change is performed and when it is not performed.

If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 120 performs control to execute the customer waiting demonstration effect including the execution history information of the setting suggestive effect (excluding the pre-game suggestive effect) (step 121IWS516). After that, the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

When the process of step 121 IWS 516 is executed, for example, in the image display device 5, an execution history indicating the number of executions of setting suggestive effects (in-game suggestive effects and jackpot-indicative effects) and execution details (performance mode at the time of execution) is displayed. A customer waiting demonstration effect is executed in which information is displayed. When the processing of step 121IWS516 is executed, the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed, and if a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect, In the image display device 5, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may be displayed. In addition, on the side of the performance control board 12, the number of executions of the setting suggestion performance (initial appearance performance, pre-game suggestion performance, in-game suggestion performance, jackpot middle suggestion performance, etc.) and the execution content (performance mode at the time of execution) are indicated. Information may be stored, and an effect of estimating and notifying a setting value from the information may be executed. It should be noted that this effect notifies the setting expectation level (or estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined standard from the execution status of the setting suggestion effect, and does not notify the actual setting value. .

In this characteristic portion 121IW, the pre-game suggestive effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 121IWS508 to 121IWS515. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggesting effect during the customer waiting demonstration effect is shown by the processing of step 121 IWS516, but the information related to the pre-game suggesting effect is excluded. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the state of the pachinko game machine 1 before the start of the game, to give the player a motivation to start playing the game from an early time zone of the business hours of the game parlor, and to enhance the interest. . Not limited to the example of this characteristic portion 121IW, for example, by using a real-time clock or the like, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only during a predetermined time period (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). good too. In addition, the execution history information of the setting suggesting effect may not include information about the in-game suggesting effect during the special period.

In addition to the configuration of this characteristic portion 121IW, the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect and the execution details are accumulated as execution history information, and a two-dimensional code or the like including the execution history information is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end of the game or the like. It may be configured to In addition, when a player takes a picture of a two-dimensional code displayed on a game machine using a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function and transmits the picture to a web server on the Internet, the web server can read the code based on the received information. A game history of a player may be managed, and a process of giving a predetermined privilege according to the game history may be performed. Alternatively, the player may access the web server using the mobile terminal (or analyze the two-dimensional code) to acquire the execution history information and display it on the display device of the mobile terminal. Alternatively, a setting suggestion image suggesting a setting value may be displayed on a display device of the mobile terminal by the player using the mobile terminal to read the two-dimensional code including the execution history information. For example, a setting value that is estimated based on a predetermined standard is calculated from the execution history information, and a setting suggestion image that suggests the calculated setting value (which is only an estimate and is different from the actual setting value) is displayed. may

(Variable display start setting process)
20-24 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 121IWS601). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result (stop symbol) is determined (step 121IWS602). That is, by executing the process of step 121IWS602 by the effect control CPU120, according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (decorative pattern is stopped) A display result determining means for determining a pattern) is realized. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data indicating the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step 121IWS602, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the decorative symbols to be stopped based on only the variation pattern command. .

In step 121IWS602, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decoration symbols in which three symbols are the same odd number symbols as the stop symbols. Further, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot), the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decoration patterns in which three patterns are the same even number patterns as the stop patterns. do.

Further, when the received display result specifying command indicates a small win, the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols of small winning patterns according to the small win type specified by the display result specifying command. . In this example, in the case of the small win type A, the combination of "135" is determined as the small winning pattern, and in the case of the small winning type B, the combination of "357" is determined as the small winning pattern. In the case of type C, a combination of "579" is determined as a small winning symbol.

Also, when the received display result designation command indicates a failure, a combination of decorative patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the ready-to-win effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined.

Incidentally, when a pseudo-run is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120, in step 121IWS602, selects a chance symbol (for example, like "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-run. , a combination of a jackpot pattern that does not become a reach and a pattern that is shifted by one pattern) is also determined.

The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display to be started this time includes super reach (step 121IWS603). It should be noted that whether or not the variable display including super reach can be specifically determined by confirming the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern command read out in step 121IWS601. If it is a variable display including super reach, the effect control CPU 120 uses a super reach type determination table for determining the type of super reach, performs lottery processing based on random numbers, and develops during the variable display of decorative patterns. Determine the type of super reach to be made (step 121IWS604).

20-25 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the super reach type determination table. Among these, FIGS. 20-25(A) show a specific example of the super reach type determination table selected when the set value is "1". 20-25(B) shows a specific example of the super reach type determination table selected when the set value is "2". 20-25(C) shows a specific example of the super reach type determination table selected when the set value is "3".

In this example, when super reach is executed during the variable display of decorative symbols, it is possible to develop four types of super reach A to D. In this example, as shown in FIG. 20-25(A), when the set value is "1", the percentage of decisions to execute Super Reach B is the highest. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-25(B), when the set value is "2", the ratio of determining to execute Super Reach C is the highest. Also, as shown in FIG. 20-25(C), when the set value is "3", the ratio of determining to execute super reach D is the highest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the icon pattern to be displayed during super reach according to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122 (step 121IWS605). At step 121 IWS 605, the effect control CPU 120 selects an icon pattern determination table for determining an icon pattern according to the setting value, uses the selected icon pattern determination table, performs lottery processing based on random numbers, and selects an icon pattern. to decide.

20-26 and 20-27 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the icon pattern determination table. Among them, FIGS. 20-26A show a specific example of the icon pattern determination table selected when the set value is "1". Also, FIG. 20-26(B) shows a specific example of the icon pattern determination table selected when the set value is "2". Also, FIG. 20-27(C) shows a specific example of the icon pattern determination table that is selected when the set value is "3".

In this example, when it is time to start super ready-to-win during the variable display of decorative patterns, panel images A to D corresponding to super ready-to-win A to D are overlapped with panel image A corresponding to super ready-to-win A at the top. is displayed. Then, according to the player's operation of the push button 31B, the panel image corresponding to Super Ready-to-Win A is erased in order, and finally the panel image displayed at the top is developed into the type of Super Ready-to-Win. is executed.

In this example, when it is decided to execute Super Reach A, the panel image corresponding to Super Reach A is displayed at the top without erasing the panel image even if the push button 31B is operated. status does not change. Further, when it is decided to execute super reach B, when the panel image corresponding to super reach B is displayed at the top, the panel image is erased even if the push button 31B is further operated. However, the panel image corresponding to super reach B remains displayed at the top. Further, when it is decided to execute super reach C, when the panel image corresponding to super reach C is displayed at the top, the panel image is erased even if the push button 31B is operated any further. However, the panel image corresponding to super reach C remains displayed at the top.

Also, in this example, icon images may be displayed on the panel images B to D corresponding to Super Reach B to D, respectively. By suggesting the current set value, the reach-in-progress suggestion effect is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 20-26 and 20-27, in this example, there are nine icon patterns, icon patterns 1-9. Icon pattern 1 is a pattern in which no icon image is displayed on any of the panel images BD. Therefore, deciding on the icon pattern 1 means deciding not to execute the in-reach suggestive effect. Further, icon pattern 2 is a pattern in which an icon image “●” is displayed on all of the panel images BD. Icon pattern 3 is a pattern in which panel images B to C are displayed with an icon image “●”, and panel image D is displayed with an icon image “▴”. Further, icon pattern 4 is a pattern in which an icon image “●” is displayed on the panel image B, and an icon image “▴” is displayed on the panel images C to D. Icon pattern 5 is a pattern in which panel image B displays an icon image "●", panel image C displays an icon image "▲", and panel image D displays an icon image "★". Further, icon pattern 6 is a pattern in which an icon image “▴” is displayed on all of the panel images BD. Further, icon pattern 7 is a pattern in which panel images B to C are displayed with an icon image “▲”, and panel image D is displayed with an icon image “★”. An icon pattern 8 is a pattern in which an icon image "▴" is displayed on the panel image B, and an icon image "★" is displayed on the panel images C to D. Icon pattern 8 is a pattern in which an icon image "*" is displayed on each of panel images BD.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 20-26(A), when the setting value is "1", the selection ratio of icon patterns 2 to 5 in which the icon image "●" is displayed on the panel image B is compared. High (total 60% chance of being selected in the event of a jackpot, 50% chance of being selected in total in the event of a loss). Therefore, in this example, when the setting value is "1", the execution ratio of Super Reach B is high. , the set value “1” is highly probable, and the set value “1” will be suggested.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-26(B), when the set value is "2", the selection ratio of icon patterns 4 to 7 in which the icon image "▲" is displayed on the panel image C is relatively high (total 60% chance of being selected in the event of a jackpot, and 50% chance of being selected in the event of a loss). Therefore, in this example, when the setting value is "2", the execution ratio of Super Reach C is high. , the set value “2” is highly probable, and the set value “2” will be suggested.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. The selection rate is relatively high (60% total probability of selection in the case of a jackpot, 50% probability of total selection in the case of a loss). Therefore, in this example, when the setting value is "3", the execution ratio of Super Reach D is high. , the setting value "3" is highly probable, and the setting value "3" will be suggested.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-26(A), when the icon pattern 2 is selected when the set value is "1", the big win is confirmed. Therefore, the expectation for a big win can be heightened for a combination of a specific setting value and icon pattern (in this example, a combination of setting value "1" and icon pattern 2). Note that, not only in the mode shown in this example, for example, when the set value is "1", the icon pattern 2 may be selected at a low rate even if the set value is "1". may

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-26(A) and (B), when the set value is "1" or "2", the rate at which the icon pattern 9 is selected is extremely high at 1%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-27(C), when the set value is "3", the percentage of selecting icon pattern 9 is relatively high (30% probability in the case of a big hit). is selected with a probability of 20% in case of failure). Therefore, in this example, when the icon image "*" is displayed on all of the panel images B to D in super reach, the expectation for the set value "3" is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase expectations for a highly advantageous set value for a combination of a specific set value and icon pattern (in this example, a combination of set value "3" and icon pattern 9). It should be noted that the configuration may be such that, for example, when the icon pattern 9 is selected, the setting value "3" is confirmed, without being limited to the aspect shown in this example.

In this example, as an example of different expectations for setting values depending on the combination of a specific setting value and icon pattern, the setting value "3" Although the case where the degree of expectation for is high has been shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a combination of a setting value "1" and an icon pattern that raises expectations for a setting value "1" is provided, or a combination of a setting value "2" that raises expectations for a setting value "2" and an icon pattern. may be provided.

Also, in this example, the case where the icon image is displayed and the during-reach suggestive effect is executed in super-reach is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be constructed such that the during-reach suggesting effect is executed in the full-rotation ready-to-win state in which all the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned with the same pattern and all three decorative patterns rotate. Further, in this case, for example, it may be configured such that, for a combination of a certain set value and the full rotation reach, the expectation for the set value of the high advantage is increased.

Also, the types of icon patterns are not limited to the icon patterns 1 to 9 shown in this example. For example, in this example, like icon patterns 2 to 9, all three panel images B to D other than panel image A have icon images. It is not necessary to display the icon image on all the panel images B to D, and it may be configured such that there is an icon pattern in which the icon image is displayed only on one or two of the panel images BD.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the during-game suggestive effect determination process for determining the presence or absence of the during-game suggestive effect and the effect mode (step 121IWS606).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the look-ahead zone effect executing flag is set (step 121IWS607). If the look-ahead zone effect execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variable display to be started this time is the variable display of the first special symbol (step 121IWS608). Whether or not it is the case to start the variable display of the first special symbol is determined, for example, by the first symbol variation designation command (specifying to start the variable display of the first special symbol) transmitted at the start of the variable display. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the effect control command) has been received. In the case of starting the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the look-ahead zone effect count counter (step 121IWS609).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the look-ahead zone effect count counter after addition is 1 (step 121IWS610). If the value of the look-ahead zone effect count counter is 1 (that is, if the look-ahead zone effect of the first variation is to be executed), the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial effect pattern as the look-ahead zone effect pattern (step 121IWS611). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS616.

If the value of the look-ahead zone effect count counter is not 1, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the current variation display will result in a big hit (step 121IWS612). It should be noted that whether or not it is a variable display that will result in a big hit can be determined, for example, by confirming the display result designation command stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is a big hit variation display, the effect control CPU 120 selects a big win look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table corresponding to the value of the look-ahead zone effect frequency counter as a table for determining a look-ahead zone effect pattern (step 121IWS613). Further, if the variation display does not result in a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table for losing according to the value of the look-ahead zone effect frequency counter as a table for determining the look-ahead zone effect pattern. (Step 121 IWS 614). Then, the effect control CPU 120 uses the selected look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table to perform lottery processing based on random numbers to determine a look-ahead zone effect pattern (step 121IWS615).

20-28 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table. Of these, FIG. 20-28(A) shows a specific example of the big hit lookahead zone effect pattern determination table when the value of the lookahead zone effect counter is 2 (when the lookahead zone effect of the second variation is executed). ing. Also, FIG. 20-28(B) shows a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table for losing when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 2 (when the look-ahead zone effect of the second variation is executed). there is Also, FIG. 20-28(C) shows a specific example of the big hit lookahead zone effect pattern determination table when the value of the lookahead zone effect counter is 3 (when the lookahead zone effect of the third variation is executed). there is Also, FIG. 20-28(D) shows a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table for losing when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 3 (when the look-ahead zone effect of the third variation is executed). there is Also, FIG. 20-28(E) shows a specific example of the big hit lookahead zone effect pattern determination table when the value of the lookahead zone effect counter is 4 (when the lookahead zone effect of the fourth variation is executed). there is Also, FIG. 20-28(F) shows a specific example of the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table for losing when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 4 (when the look-ahead zone effect of the fourth variation is executed). there is

As shown in FIGS. 20-28, in this example, there are three types of look-ahead zone effect patterns 1 to 3 as look-ahead zone effect patterns. The look-ahead zone production pattern 1 is a pattern suggesting that the set value is "1" if the current variable display results in a big win. Further, the look-ahead zone effect pattern 2 is a pattern that suggests that the set value is "2" if a big win is achieved in this variable display. Further, the look-ahead zone effect pattern 3 is a pattern suggesting that the set value is "3" if a big win is achieved in this variable display.

As shown in FIG. 20-28, in this example, when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 2 (when the look-ahead zone effect of the second variation is executed), the set value is "1" and a big hit is achieved. Then, the look-ahead zone effect pattern 1 is selected at a high rate of 80%. In addition, when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 3 (when the look-ahead zone effect of the third variation is executed), if the set value is "2" and a big win is achieved, the look-ahead zone effect pattern 2 is set to 80% higher. Select by percentage. In addition, when the value of the look-ahead zone effect counter is 4 (when the look-ahead zone effect of the fourth variation is executed), if the set value is "3" and a big hit is achieved, the look-ahead zone effect pattern 3 is increased by 80%. Select by percentage. Therefore, in this example, if the set value "1" is suggested in the second variation look-ahead zone effect and the hit is achieved, the set value "1" is highly accurate, and is set in the look-ahead zone effect of the third variation. When the value ``2'' is suggested and a big hit is achieved, the set value ``2'' has a high precision, and when the set value ``3'' is suggested in the fourth variation look-ahead zone production and a big hit is achieved. It is configured to increase the accuracy of the set value "3".

The configuration of the look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, depending on whether or not the variable display of this time is the variable display of the advance notice target of the look-ahead zone effect, it is configured to use a different look-ahead zone effect pattern determination table, or to vary the distribution of the judgment value. You may In this case, for example, if the variable display this time is a variable display that is subject to advance notice of the look-ahead zone effect, if the variable display this time is not correct, a high level such as a look-ahead zone effect pattern 3 suggesting the set value "3" is displayed. It may be configured such that a pattern suggesting a setting is likely to be selected.

Next, the effect control CPU 120, if the execution of the variation pattern, the look-ahead zone effect, the suggestive effect during the reach, and the suggestive effect during the game is determined, the look-ahead zone effect (for example, the look-ahead zone effect pattern) or the reach A process table corresponding to the mid-game suggestive effect (for example, icon pattern) and the mid-game suggestive effect is selected (step 121IWS616). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 121IWS617).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (parts for effect) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. In addition, the process timer set value is set with a variable time in the mode of variation. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decoration pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Also, the process table is stored in the ROM 121 in the effect control board 12 . Also, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, in the process table used when performing the effect control for the variation pattern involving the ready-to-win effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed. Process data indicating to display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the simulated run and the sliding effect. may

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 121IWS618).

In addition, in this characteristic portion 121IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls such that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 121IWS619). Next, the effect control CPU 120 deletes one command at the time of starting winning stored in the storage area of the command storing area at the time of starting winning (symbol designation command, variable category command, and reserved storage number addition designation command), The contents of the start winning command storage area are shifted (step 121IWS620).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "2" (step 121IWS621), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(During-game suggestion effect determination process)
FIGS. 20-29 are flow charts showing an example of the in-game suggestion effect determination process (step 121IWS606). The in-game suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the during-game suggestive effect determination process, when the special period is being executed (Y in step 121IWS701), the effect control CPU 120 selects the first during-game suggestive effect determination table (step 121IWS702), and is not during the special period. In the case (N of step 121IWS701), the second in-game suggestion effect determination table is selected (step 121IWS703). For example, when a setting change end command or a set value command is received, the special period flag is set, and when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag is reset. For example, by confirming the state of the special period flag, it can be confirmed in step 121IWS701 whether or not it is during the special period.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the setting value command reception flag is set (step 121IWS704). If the setting value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122, Using the selected in-game suggestive effect determination table, whether or not to execute the in-game suggestive effect, and in the case of execution, the effect mode is determined (step 121IWS705).

FIG. 20-30(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first during-game suggestive effect determination table used during the special period, and FIG. 20-30(B) is a second during-game suggestive effect used during the non-special period. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a decision table;

20-30 (A) and (B) show the first and second in-game suggestive effect determination tables, in which the in-game suggestive effect is executed in the order of set values "1"<"2"<"3". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage of With such a configuration, it is suggested that an advantageous set value is set by executing the in-game suggestion effect.

Also, regarding the second effect mode (mini-characters A and B appear), the set value "1"<"2"<"3" has a high rate of execution in the order, and the first effect mode (mini-character A appears). Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in the execution ratio between the set values is greater than . That is, the second effect mode has a high degree of reliability that the set value is set to be more advantageous than the first effect mode.

In addition, in the first and second in-game suggestive effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestive effect in the second effect mode with high reliability is executed only during the special period. is configured as With such a configuration, it is possible to motivate players to play games during the special period, and to enhance interest.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 20-30(A) and (B), the third rendering mode (character C appearance) may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, the setting value "3" is determined by executing the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to reasons such as missing commands or garbled data), effect control The CPU 120 checks whether the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 121IWS706). Incidentally, whether or not it is the production mode A can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. If the effect mode is A, the effect control CPU 120 uses the selected in-game suggestive effect determination table to determine whether or not to execute the in-game suggestive effect and the effect mode assuming that the set value is "1" ( step 121 IWS 707).

By executing the processing of steps 121IWS706 to S707, in this characterizing section 121IW, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is A, the setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting Whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined as "1". As shown in FIGS. 20-30 (A) and (B), for the setting value "1", the ratio of determining to execute the suggestive effect during the game itself is low, and the ratio of determining the second effect mode is low. is the lowest, and there is no case where the third rendering mode is determined. Such a configuration reduces the situation in which the suggestive performance during the game is executed by the second performance mode or the third performance mode in spite of the disadvantageous set value being set, and the player is rather discouraged. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the decline in interest in the game.

If it is not the production mode A, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the current production mode is the production mode C (step 121IWS708). It should be noted that whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set. If the effect mode is C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the during-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the during-game suggestive effect and the effect mode (step 121IWS709).

FIG. 20-30(C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the in-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 20-30(C), in the during-game suggestive effect determination table for the effect mode C, the rate of determination to execute the during-game suggestive effect is lower than in the case of the set value "3". , is also determined to be the third effect mode.

By executing the processing of steps 121IWS708 to S709, in this characterizing section 121IW, if the setting value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode is C, a disadvantageous setting value is set. To reduce a situation in which a suggestive performance during a game is executed by a second performance mode or a third performance mode in spite of the fact that the player is in the game and disappoint the player instead, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

On the other hand, if it is not the production mode C (that is, if the current production mode is the production mode B), the production control CPU 120 ends the process as it is. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted so as not to execute the during-game suggestive effect.

By executing the processing of step 121IWS708, this characterizing section 121IW does not execute the in-game suggestion effect when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode is B, To prevent a decline in interest in a game by reducing a situation in which a suggestive performance during a game is executed in spite of setting a disadvantageous set value and disappointing the player instead.

Incidentally, even when the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, the in-game suggestive effect may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table is used in which the execution ratio of the during-game suggestive effect is set lower than the setting value "1" of the during-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIGS. may be configured to determine the presence or absence and type of the in-game suggestive effect.

20-30 (A) and (B), only a specific rendering mode (for example, the second rendering mode) out of the plurality of rendering modes is executed according to the set value. Different ratios may be used.

Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of being a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the set value 1, by not determining the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode), when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, the setting The possibility of being value 1 is denied, and setting value 2 or setting value 3 is determined. Further, when a specific effect mode (for example, a second effect mode) is executed, a specific set value may be determined. For example, only when the set value is 3, the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is determined, so that when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, The set value 3 is determined.

In this characteristic portion 121IW, it is possible to execute suggestive effects during the game at different ratios according to the set values. 3 production modes) are different, the execution ratios of the first production mode, the second production mode and the third production mode are different according to the set value, only the specific production mode according to the set value This is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 121IW, it is configured to be able to execute a common mode (for example, the first performance mode) during the game suggestion effect in the special period and the non-special period, but it is not limited to such a configuration. , it may be possible to execute a suggestive effect during the game in a different mode. For example, the size, color, etc. of the mini-character A may differ between the special period and the non-special period.

Further, in this characteristic portion 121IW, whether or not the suggestive effect during the game is executed and the effect mode in the case of execution are different depending on whether it is the special period or the non-special period and the set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the variation time specified by the variation pattern, the presence or absence of the reach effect, the type of reach effect, the presence or absence of the pseudo-continuous effect, the type of the pseudo-continuous effect, and the display result are the big hits. Depending on whether or not, the presence or absence of execution of the suggestive effect during the game, and the effect mode in the case of execution may differ.

For example, it may be possible to execute the during-game suggestion effect only when the variation pattern includes at least the ready-to-win effect (that is, the variation time is longer than the non-ready-to-win variation pattern). Further, for example, between a variation pattern including super reach B and a variation pattern including super reach A having a higher degree of expectation than super reach B, the latter seems to have a higher rate of execution of suggestive effects during the game. Alternatively, the reliability may be increased when the suggestive effect during the game is executed, or the ratio of the suggestive effect during the game being executed may be increased and the reliability when the effect is executed may be increased. You can make it higher.

Further, for example, between a variation pattern that includes a pseudo-continuous effect and a variation pattern that does not include a pseudo-continuous effect (or has a smaller number of pseudo-continuous effects than the former), the former has a higher rate of execution of the suggestive effect during the game. It may be made higher, the reliability may be increased when the suggestive performance during the game is executed, the ratio of the suggestive performance during the game being executed may be increased, and the reliability when the suggestive performance during the game is executed may be increased. The reliability may be increased.

Further, for example, between a variation pattern in which the display result is a big win and a variation pattern in which the display result is not a big win, the former may have a higher ratio of execution of the suggestive effect during the game. It is possible to increase the reliability when the middle suggestive performance is executed, or to increase the ratio of executing the mid-game suggestive performance and to increase the reliability when it is executed. .

(Effect processing during variable display)
20-31 is a flow chart showing the effect processing during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 121IWS801) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 121IWS802). When the process timer times out (step 121IWS803), the process data is switched. That is, the next process timer set value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 121IWS804). Also, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data which are set next (step 121IWS805).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not super reach is being executed (step 121IWS806). Whether or not super reach is being executed can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the variable time timer set in step 121IWS619 of the variable display start setting process. If super reach is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not a detection signal is input from the push button 31B (step 121IWS807). If the detection signal from the push button 31B is input (that is, if the push button 31B is in the ON state), the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of times the push button 31B is operated (the number of consecutive hits). The value of the operation counter is incremented by 1 (step 121IWS808).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the type of super reach is determined to be super reach A (step 121IWS809). If super reach A is determined, the process proceeds directly to step 121IWS818. If it is not determined to be super reach A (that is, if it is determined to be super reach B to D), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the value of the operation counter is 1 ( step 121 IWS 810). If the value of the operation number counter is 1, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the panel image A if the panel image A corresponding to the super reach A is displayed on the image display device 5 ( step 121 (IWS 811).

When super reach B to D is determined by executing the processing of steps 121 IWS809 to S811, the panel images A to D are displayed on the image display device 5 in an overlapping state, and then the push button is pressed. The panel image A is erased based on one operation of the button 31B.

If the value of the operation number counter is not 1, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the type of super reach is determined to be super reach B (step 121IWS812). If super reach B is determined, the process proceeds directly to step 121IWS818. If it is not determined to be super reach B (that is, if it is determined to be super reach C to D), the effect control CPU 120 will set the value of the operation counter to the first predetermined number (for example, 10). is confirmed (step 121IWS813). If the value of the operation number counter is the first predetermined number, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the panel image B if the panel image B corresponding to the super reach B is displayed on the image display device 5. (step 121IWS814).

When Super Reach C to D is determined by executing the processing of steps 121 IWS812 to S814, panel images A to D are started to be displayed on the image display device 5 in an overlapping state, and panel image A is displayed. is erased, the panel image B is erased when the push button 31B is repeatedly pressed a first predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times).

If the value of the operation number counter is not the first predetermined number, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the type of super reach is determined to be super reach C (step 121IWS815). If super reach C is determined, the process proceeds directly to step 121IWS818. If it is not determined to be super reach C (that is, if it is determined to be super reach D), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the value of the operation counter is a second predetermined number (for example, 20) Confirm whether or not (step 121IWS816). If the value of the operation number counter is the second predetermined number, the effect control CPU 120 controls to erase the panel image C if the panel image C corresponding to the super reach C is displayed on the image display device 5. (step 121IWS817).

When super reach D is determined by executing the processing of steps 121 IWS815 to S817, panel images A to D are started to be displayed on the image display device 5, and panel image A and panel image A are superimposed on each other. After the image B is erased, the panel image C is erased when the push button 31B is pressed a second predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the effective period of operation during super reach has ended (step 121IWS818). Whether or not the valid operation period has ended can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the variable time timer set in step 121IWS619 of the variable display start setting process. If the operation effective period has not expired, the process proceeds directly to step 121IWS826. If the operation effective period has ended, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the operation number counter is 1 or more (step 121IWS819). If the value of the operation number counter is not 1 or more (if the value of the operation number counter is 0 (that is, if the push button 31B has not been operated even once within the effective period of operation during Super Reach)), it is left as it is. Go to step 121 IWS824.

If the value of the operation number counter is 1 or more (that is, if the push button 31B is operated at least once within the effective period of operation during super reach), the effect control CPU 120 selects super as the type of super reach. It is checked whether or not reach C is determined (step 121IWS820). If super reach C is determined, the effect control CPU 120 forcibly erases the panel image B if the panel image B is still displayed on the image display device 5 (step 121IWS821). It should be noted that the determination of Y in step 121IWS819 means that the push button 31B has been operated at least once, so at least the panel image A should have been erased at this stage.

If super reach C is not determined, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not super reach D is determined as the type of super reach (step 121IWS822). When super reach D is determined, the effect control CPU 120 forcibly erases the panel image B and the panel image C if the panel image B and the panel image C are still displayed on the image display device 5. Control is performed (step 121IWS823). It should be noted that the determination of Y in step 121IWS819 means that the push button 31B has been operated at least once, so at least the panel image A should have been erased at this stage.

On the other hand, if it is not determined to be super reach D (that is, if it is determined to be super reach A or super reach B), the process proceeds directly to step 121IWS824.

By executing the processing of steps 121IWS819 to S823, in this example, when super reach C or super reach D is determined, the player operates the push button 31B up to the first predetermined number or the second predetermined number. If the panel image B or the panel image C is still displayed, the panel image C or the panel image D is forcibly displayed at the top. For example, if super reach C is determined, panel image C is forcibly displayed at the top, and if super reach D is determined, panel image D is forcibly displayed. It is set to the state displayed at the top. On the other hand, if the player has not operated the push button 31B even once when Super Reach B to D has been determined (in this case, the panel image A is still displayed at the top). ), the panel image A remains displayed at the top.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 switches to a process table corresponding to the super reach corresponding to the panel image displayed first on the image display device 5 (step 121IWS824). For example, when panel image A is displayed first, the process data is switched to super reach A, and when panel image B is displayed first, the process data is switched to super reach B, When the panel image C is displayed at the top, the process data is switched to the process data corresponding to the super reach C, and when the panel image D is displayed at the top, the process data is switched to the process data corresponding to the super reach D. Then, the effect control CPU 120 restarts the process timer (step 121IWS825).

After that, according to the process data switched in step 121IWS824, the process of step 121IWS805 is executed at the timing of the next timer interrupt, thereby executing the effect that develops to super reach AD.

The value of the operation counter may be cleared to 0, for example, when super reach or variable display is terminated.

Then, if the variable time timer has timed out (step 121IWS826), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "3" (step 121IWS827), and terminates the effect process during variable display.

(Production decision processing during jackpot)
FIG. 20-33 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect determination process during the big hit. During the big hit, the effect determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-process (step S114). In the big hit production determination process, the production control CPU 120 checks whether or not the setting value command reception flag is set (step 121IWS901). If the setting value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122, Whether or not to execute a suggesting performance during a big hit, and the mode of performance in the case of execution is determined (step 121IWS902). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS907.

In step S121IWS902, if it is a period (hereinafter also referred to as a specific period) from the start of the game until the variable display is executed a specific number of times (100 times in this example), the The 1st big-hit suggestive performance determination table is selected, and if it is not during the specific period, the 2nd big-hit mid-suggestive performance determination table shown in FIG. 20-34(B) is selected. Then, whether or not to execute the middle-big-hit suggesting performance and the manner of performance in the case of execution are determined based on the selected table for determining the middle-big-hit suggesting performance and the set value. It should be noted that the "game start time point" here refers to the time point at which the first variation display starts after the power is turned on, but is not limited to this. It may be at the time when the display is started, or at the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. In addition, in this characteristic portion 121IW, regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variable display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) is defined as the specific period. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variable display a specific number of times (100 times in this example) may be the specific period. Further, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, the first specific period (the period from the start of the game until the fluctuation display is executed 50 times), the second specific period (the 51st fluctuation after the start of the game) A period from the display to the execution of the 100th variable display) may use a mid-jackpot suggesting effect determination table in which the presence or absence of the mid-jackpot suggesting effect and the determination ratio of the effect mode are different.

20-34 (A) and (B) show the first and second jackpot mid-suggestion performance determination tables, the jackpot mid-suggestion performance is executed in the order of set values "1" < "2" < "3". Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage of With such a configuration, it is suggested that an advantageous set value is set by executing the effect suggesting during the big hit.

In addition, regarding the second rendering mode and the third rendering mode, the ratio of execution in the order of the set values “1”<“2”<“3” is high, and the execution ratio between the set values in the specific period and the non-specific period Judgment values are assigned so that the difference between In other words, during the specific period, it is configured such that the suggesting production during the big hit with higher reliability than the non-specific period is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game during the specific period, and to increase the interest. It should be noted that not only the structure of this characterizing portion 121IW, but also the effect suggesting during the jackpot (or a specific effect mode thereof) may be executed only during a specific period and may not be executed during a non-specific period.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 20-34(A) and (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, the setting value "3" is determined by executing the effect indicating that the jackpot is in progress according to the fourth effect mode.

In this characteristic portion 121IW, when the effect suggesting during the big win is executed in the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B1), a dialogue C image (“high setting!?”) 121IW102 is displayed.

Further, when the jackpot indicating effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in 20-36(C1), a dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 121IW105 is displayed.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to reasons such as missing commands or garbled data), effect control The CPU 120 checks whether the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 121IWS903). Incidentally, whether or not it is the production mode A can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. In the production mode A, the production control CPU 120 uses the selected big-hit suggesting production determination table assuming that the set value is "1", and determines whether or not to execute the big-hit suggesting production and the production mode ( step 121 IWS 904). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS907.

By executing the processing of steps 121IWS903 to S904, in this characterizing section 121IW, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is A, the setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting Whether or not to execute a suggesting effect during a big hit and the effect mode are determined as "1". As shown in FIGS. 20-34 (A) and (B), for the set value "1", the rate of determination of the second rendering mode and the third rendering mode is the lowest, and the fourth rendering mode is determined. never be. By constructing in this manner, the player is rather discouraged by executing the performance suggesting that the jackpot is in progress by the second performance mode, the third performance mode, and the third performance mode in spite of the disadvantageous set value being set. It is possible to reduce the situation where the game is lost and prevent the decline in interest in the game.

If it is not the production mode A, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the current production mode is the production mode C (step 121IWS905). It should be noted that whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set. If the effect mode is C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the during-big-hit suggesting effect determination table for effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the during-big-hit suggesting effect and the effect mode (step 121IWS906). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS907.

FIG. 20-34(C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a jackpot mid-jackpot effect determination table for effect mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 20-34 (C), in the big-hit suggestive effect determination table for the production mode C, the ratio of deciding to execute the big-hit suggestive effect itself is low, and the set value is "2" or "3". As compared with , the ratio of determination to the second rendering mode or the third rendering mode is low, and there is no case of determination to be the fourth rendering mode.

By executing the processing of steps 121IWS905 to S906, in this characterizing section 121IW, if the setting value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode is C, a disadvantageous setting value is set. In spite of the presence of the player, the second performance mode, the third performance mode, and the third performance mode are used to reduce the situation in which the player is rather discouraged by the execution of the suggesting performance during the big win by the second performance mode, the third performance mode, and the third performance mode, and to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game. I have to.

On the other hand, if it is not the production mode C (that is, if the current production mode is the production mode B), the production control CPU 120 proceeds directly to step 121IWS907. That is, in the case of the performance mode B, it is restricted so as not to execute the suggestive performance during the big hit.

By executing the process of step 121IWS905, in this characterizing part 121IW, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode is B, by not executing the suggestive effect during the big hit, To prevent a player from losing interest in a game by reducing a situation in which a player is rather discouraged by execution of a jackpot suggesting performance in spite of the setting of a disadvantageous set value.

In addition, even when the set value command is not normally received in the performance mode B, it may be possible to execute the performance suggesting during the big win at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table is used in which the execution ratio of the suggestion effect during the jackpot is set lower than the setting value "1" of the table for determining the suggestion effect during the jackpot shown in FIGS. It may be configured so as to determine the presence or absence and type of the jackpot middle suggestive effect.

20-34 (A) and (B), only a specific rendering mode (for example, the third rendering mode) out of the plurality of rendering modes is executed according to the setting value. Different ratios may be used.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 20-34 (A), when a big win is achieved in a specific period, the production indicating that the big win is in progress is always executed. may In this case, the non-execution rate may be varied according to the set value. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 20-34 (B), regardless of the setting value, the ratio of non-execution of the suggestion effect during the big hit is the same, but the ratio of non-execution is different according to the setting value. You may allow

In addition, in this characteristic part 121IW, when a big win is achieved in a specific period, a suggestion performance during a big hit is executed as a setting suggestion performance. A setting suggesting effect (for example, a dialog image suggesting a set value is displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied) may be executed based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied during a specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be established, for example, when the number of executions of the ready-to-win effect or pseudo-continuous effect reaches a predetermined number of times, or when a specific super ready-to-win effect or advance notice effect is executed.

In this characteristic portion 121IW, it is possible to execute the suggesting effect during the big hit at a different rate according to the set value, but this is the suggestive effect during the big hit (first effect mode, second effect mode, third effect mode) according to the set value. (including the effect mode and the fourth effect mode) are different, the execution rates of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode are different according to the set value, the set value It is a concept including that only a specific rendering mode (for example, the third rendering mode) has a different execution ratio depending on the situation.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the character object effect (step 121IWS907).

Here, for example, it is assumed that the movable member 121IW101 is provided above the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 20-35(A1). In such a configuration, when the character effect is executed, the movable member 121IW101 is controlled to move to the front of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B2).

As shown in FIGS. 20-35 (A1) and (B2), when the character effect is executed, the movable member 121IW101 moves to the front of the image display device 5, so that the image display device 5 generates a jackpot-indicating effect. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the position where the dialogue image is displayed. In this characteristic portion 121IW, since the suggesting effect during the big win and the character effect are executed at different timings during the fanfare period in the big win game, the movable member 121IW101 actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 is the big win. The dialogue image displayed by the intermediate suggestive effect is not covered. However, when the movable member 121IW101 is operated by the performance of the character during the fanfare period, the player's attention is directed to the movable member 121IW101, and there is a risk of overlooking the dialogue image displayed by the suggestion performance during the big win. Therefore, in step 121IWS907, by using the character object effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-34(D), the character object effect is not executed when the suggesting effect during the big hit is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest due to difficulty in recognizing the effect suggesting during the big win. Also, with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the impossibility of recognizing the during-big-win suggestive performance even if the during-big-win suggestive performance and the accessory performance are executed at the same timing.

In addition, when the execution of the suggestive effect during the big hit is determined, the execution timing of either the suggestive effect during the big hit or the performance of the character is changed (for example, the role effect is performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestive effect during the big hit is performed. During the ending period), it may be possible to prevent it from becoming difficult to recognize the suggestive effect during the big win. Further, when execution of the suggesting performance during the big win is determined, the operation mode of the movable member 121IW101 is changed (for example, it is controlled so as not to stop at a position overlapping the dialogue image by the suggesting performance during the big win), or the big win is performed. It is also possible to prevent the difficulty in recognizing the mid-big-hit suggestive effect by changing the display position of the dialogue image by the medium suggestive effect. Further, when execution of the suggesting effect during the big hit is determined, the performance of the character effect may be restricted by lowering the execution ratio of the character effect. Also, the execution of the performance of the character product may be restricted only for a specific period. Further, not only the example shown in FIG. 20-34(D), but also when the suggestive effect during the big win is executed, the character object effect may be executed at a low rate.

Next, if the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the character effect (N of step 121IWS908), it determines the presence or absence of the light guide plate effect (step 121IWS909).

Here, on the front surface of the image display device 5, a light guide plate 121IW103 having a translucent property that allows light to pass therethrough and a light emitter provided to allow light to enter from the end surface of the light guide plate are provided. It is assumed that there is provided a reflecting portion that reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 121IW103 from the end face of the light guide plate 121IW103 by the light emitter and emits the light to the front of the game machine. Then, by causing the light emitting body to emit light, it is possible to execute a light guide plate presentation in which light is emitted from the reflection portion provided on the light guide plate 121IW103 to the front of the game machine. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B3), light is emitted from the reflection portion provided on the light guide plate 121IW103 to the front of the gaming machine, resulting in a "jackpot". characters appear. In addition, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5 during execution of the light guide plate effect.

In step 121 IWS 909, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-34(E), the light guide plate effect is executed at different ratios according to the presence or absence of the suggesting effect during the jackpot and the effect mode when it is executed. be. Specifically, when the jackpot indicating performance in the first performance mode is executed, the ratio of the light guide plate performance to be performed is high, and the second performance mode, the third performance mode and the fourth performance mode suggesting that the jackpot is in progress. It is configured such that the rate at which the light guide plate effect is executed becomes low when the effect is executed. In other words, when the performance suggesting during the big win is executed in a mode of performance that does not suggest that the setting value is advantageous, the proportion of the light guide plate performance being executed is high, and the performance suggesting during the big win is configured to be difficult to visually recognize. there is For example, as shown in FIG. 20-35 (B4), the light guide plate effect is executed when the dialogue A image ("setting is...") 121IW104 is displayed by the suggesting effect during the jackpot in the first effect mode. Then, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the dialogue A image. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game due to the effect suggesting during the jackpot, which is an undesirable effect mode for the player. When the second performance mode, the third performance mode, and the fourth performance mode suggesting performance during the big hit are executed, the execution timing of either the mid-jackpot suggesting performance or the light guide plate performance is changed (for example, the light guide plate The effect may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestive effect during the big hit may be performed during the ending period).

(Small hit end effect processing)
FIG. 20-37 is a flow chart showing small hit end effect processing (step S175) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the effect period measurement timer (step 121IWS1001). Then, it is checked whether or not the effect period measurement timer after the subtraction has timed out (step 121IWS1002). In addition, the production period measurement timer is set based on confirmation of reception of the small hit end designation command in the production process (see step S174) during the small hit, for example.

If the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N of step 121IWS1002), the production control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 121IWS1003). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the The control of the game effect lamp 9 and the speakers 8L and 8R as parts for presentation is executed (step 121IWS1004).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the process when the process timer has not timed out (N of step 121IWS1005). When the process timer times out (Y in step 121IWS1005), the process data is switched. That is, the next process timer set value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 121IWS1006). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 starts a process timer (step 121IWS1007).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect stage determination table corresponding to the small win type as a table for determining whether or not to change the effect stage after the end of the small win game and the type of the changed effect stage. (Step 121 IWS 1008). Next, the performance control CPU 120 performs lottery processing based on random numbers using the selected performance stage determination table, and determines whether or not to change the performance stage after the end of the small winning game and the type of the performance stage after the change. (Step 121 IWS 1009).

FIG. 20-38 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the production stage determination table. Among them, FIG. 20-38(A) shows a specific example of the effect stage determination table selected when the small hit type A is selected. Further, FIG. 20-38(B) shows a specific example of the effect stage determination table selected when the small hit type B is selected. Further, FIG. 20-38(C) shows a specific example of the production stage determination table selected when the small hit type C is selected.

As shown in FIG. 20-38, in the production stage determination table, judgment values are assigned to no production stage change, production stage A change, production stage B change, and production stage C change. there is When the production stage is changed, as shown in FIG. 20-38, when the set value is "1", the ratio of change to production stage A is high. Therefore, in this example, it is suggested that the set value is "1" when the effect stage is changed to A after the end of the small winning game. Also, when the production stage is changed, as shown in FIG. 20-38, when the setting value is "2", the ratio of changing to production stage B is high. Therefore, in this example, it is suggested that the set value is "2" when the stage is changed to the production stage B after the end of the small winning game. Further, when the production stage is changed, as shown in FIG. 20-38, there is a case where the production stage is changed to production stage C only when the set value is "3". Therefore, in this example, it is suggested that the set value is "3" when the effect stage is changed to C after the end of the small winning game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-38(C), in this example, in the case of the small win type C, if the setting value is "1", the production stage A is selected at a high rate of 50%. , when the setting value is "2", the production stage B is selected at a high ratio of 60%, and when the setting value is "3", the production stage C is selected at a high ratio of 50%. there is Therefore, in this example, the suggestion of the setting value by the production stage changed after the end of the small win game based on the small win type C is the most reliable. On the other hand, in this example, in the case of the small hit type A, the ratio of selecting the production stage A when the setting value is "1" is only 30%, and when the setting value is "2", the production stage The percentage of selecting B is only 40%, and the percentage of selecting production stage C when the set value is "3" is only 30%. Therefore, in this example, the suggestion of the setting value by the production stage changed after the end of the small-hit game based on the small-hit type A has the lowest reliability.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-38, the production stage is not necessarily changed after the end of the small winning game, and there are cases where the production stage is not changed, but the setting value is "1". ∼ "3", the ratio determined without changing the production stage is different (in other words, the ratio of changing the production stage is also different).

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-38, a production stage C is provided in which the setting value is determined to be "3", and a specific production stage (in this example, production stage C) is provided according to the setting value. The rate changed to stage C) is different. It should be noted that it is not limited to such a mode, and for example, even when the setting value is "1" or "2", it may be configured to change to the production stage C at a low rate.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-38, the lottery processing by the effect control CPU 120 shows the case where the determination ratio of the presence or absence of the change of the effect stage and the type of the effect stage after the change is changed. , is not limited to such aspects. For example, when the gaming machine is configured so that the small win probability differs depending on which of the set values is "1" to "3", the production stage is changed as a result of the small win probability differing depending on the set value. It may be configured such that the determination ratio of the presence/absence of or the type of production stage after the change is varied. Also, for example, whether or not there is a change in the production stage for each small hit type and the determination ratio of the type of production stage after the change are configured to be the same, and the set value "1" to "3" By determining the type of small hit with a different ratio depending on the situation, the presence or absence of the change of the production stage and the determination ratio of the type of the production stage after the change may be changed.

When it is decided to change the production stage (Y in step 121IWS1010), the production control CPU 120 changes the background image displayed on the image display device 5 to the background image corresponding to the production stage after the change. Control to change is performed (step 121IWS1011).

In addition, in this characteristic part 121IW, when a small hit occurs and the production stage is changed, a background image corresponding to the changed production stage is displayed over a plurality of variable displays until the next small win occurs. and

In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, after changing the production stage, when the variable display is completed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times), the normal production stage is returned to the normal background image. may be configured. Further, for example, the production stage may be configured to be changeable each time a small win occurs, or once the production stage is changed, even if a small win occurs, the production stage will not be changed again. may be configured.

Further, in this example, when the performance stage is changed after the end of the small winning game, the background image corresponding to the performance stage after the change is displayed over a plurality of times of fluctuation display, but such a mode is shown. not limited to For example, it is not always necessary to execute over a plurality of variable displays, and after the end of the small winning game, an effect suggesting the set value is executed only once (executing a single effect suggesting the set value). may be configured.

If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y of step 121IWS1002), the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "0" (step 121IWS1012), and ends the small hit end effect processing.

Next, a description will be given of an example of an effect in the characteristic portion 121IW. First, a description will be given of an effect mode when the effect stage is changed after the end of the small winning game. FIGS. 20-39 and 20-40 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of an effect mode when changing the effect stage after the end of the small winning game. In addition, in FIGS. 20-39 and 20-40, it is assumed that the presentation mode changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

First, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-39, it is assumed that the set value is set to "1". As shown in FIG. 20-39(A), the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns is executed, and as shown in FIG. It is assumed that the symbols (in this example, a combination of symbols of "357") are confirmed and displayed, and the small winning game is executed. Then, it is assumed that it is decided to change to production stage A, which suggests that the set value is "1", and as shown in FIG. It is assumed that the background image has been changed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-39(C), the background image corresponding to production stage A is changed to an image of a school of fish 121IW106 swimming in the sea.

Also, in the example shown in FIGS. 20-40, it is assumed that the set value is set to "3". As shown in FIG. 20-40(A), the variable display of left, middle, and right decoration symbols is executed, and as shown in FIG. It is assumed that the symbols (in this example, a combination of symbols of "579") are confirmed and displayed, and the small winning game is executed. Then, it is assumed that it is decided to change to production stage C, which suggests that the set value is "3", and as shown in FIG. It is assumed that the background image has been changed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-40(C), the background image corresponding to production stage C is changed to an image of rocket 121IW107 flying toward moon 121IW108 in outer space.

20-39 and 20-40 are only examples. For example, when the small hit type A is obtained, the small hits are shown in FIGS. 20-39 (B) and 20-40 (B). It suffices that the type A small winning symbol (for example, a combination of "135" symbols) is fixedly displayed. Further, for example, when changing to production stage B, a background image corresponding to production stage B (for example, a flock of birds flying in the air) is shown in FIGS. image).

In the example shown in FIGS. 20-39, the case of changing to the production stage A is shown, but in this example, even if the setting value is "1", the change to the production stage B is performed at a low rate. (See Figures 20-38). In the example shown in FIGS. 20-40, the case of changing to the production stage C is shown, but in this example, even if the setting value is "3", the production stage A and the production stage are changed at a low rate. It may be changed to B (see Figures 20-38).

It should be noted that the effect mode when changing the effect stage after the end of the small winning game is not limited to those shown in FIGS. 20-39 and 20-40. For example, a battle effect is executed at the end of a small prize game, and when a friendly character wins the battle, the effect stage is changed and the background image is switched to suggest a set value, and when the friendly character loses the battle, the effect stage is performed. may not be changed and the background image may not be changed. In this way, various production modes are conceivable.

Also, in this example, a case was shown in which the set value is suggested by changing the production stage after the end of the small win game, but the method of suggesting the set value in relation to the small win is the same as that shown in this example. not limited to For example, when the period of the small winning game is secured to some extent, the setting value may be suggested by causing a predetermined character or the like associated with the setting value to appear during the small winning game. . Further, for example, when a plurality of combinations of small winning patterns (combination of decorative patterns) are provided, the small winning patterns are configured to be associated with the set values, and any of the small winning patterns is stopped and displayed. It may be configured such that the set value is suggested depending on whether the In addition, for example, when it is configured to be able to shift to a so-called variable probability latency state after a sudden variable probability big hit or a small hit, the set value can be suggested depending on whether the variable probability latency period after the small hit is long or short, or the variable probability latency period It may be configured to execute an effect suggesting a set value inside.

Moreover, in this example, the case where the production stage is changed assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied with the end of the small winning game as a trigger is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, lottery processing based on random numbers may be performed, and the effect stage may be changed assuming that a predetermined condition has been established based on winning the lottery. Further, for example, it may be configured such that the performance stage is changed assuming that a predetermined condition is established based on the number of executions of the variable display reaching a predetermined number of times.

Next, an effect mode of the look-ahead zone effect will be described. FIGS. 20-41 and 20-42 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the effect mode of the look-ahead zone effect. In addition, in FIGS. 20-41 and 20-42, it is assumed that the presentation mode changes in the order of (A), (B), (C), . . .

As shown in FIG. 20-41 (A), during the variable display of the decorative pattern, a new start winning to the first start winning opening occurs, and four first hold displays are accumulated in the first hold memory display unit 121IW109. It is assumed that the Then, it is assumed that execution of the look-ahead zone effect is determined based on the occurrence of a new starting prize to the first starting prize winning port.

Next, when the first variable display is executed after the start winning to the first start winning opening occurs, as shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 20-41(B), a character 121IW110 is displayed on the image display device 5, and a character display 121IW111 of "Enter the zone!" .

It should be noted that, if the first variation display results in a big hit, the look-ahead zone effect is terminated as it is, and the screen does not move to the effect screen shown in FIG. Although the production is executed, the setting value is not substantially suggested).

Next, when the second variable display is executed after the start winning to the first start winning opening occurs, it is assumed that the look-ahead zone effect pattern 1 is determined as the look-ahead zone effect pattern (see FIGS. 20-28). Then, as shown in FIG. 20-41(C), the look-ahead zone effect based on the look-ahead zone effect pattern 1 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-41(C), the character 121IW110 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the line of the character 121IW110 is "If you win now, set '1'?" ] is displayed.

If a big win is achieved in the second variable display, the look-ahead zone effect is terminated as it is, and the subsequent effect screen shown in FIG. 20-41(D) is not displayed. In this case, "If you win right now, set "1"? is displayed, it is suggested that the set value is set to "1".

Next, it is assumed that the look-ahead zone effect pattern 2 is determined as the look-ahead zone effect pattern when executing the third variable display after the occurrence of the start-up prize in the first start-up prize slot (see FIGS. 20-28). Then, as shown in FIG. 20-41(D), the look-ahead zone effect based on the look-ahead zone effect pattern 2 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-41(D), the character 121IW110 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the line of the character 121IW110 is "If you win now, set '2'?" ] is displayed.

If a big win is achieved in the third variable display, the look-ahead zone effect is terminated as it is, and the subsequent effect screen shown in FIG. 20-41(D) is not displayed. In this case, "if you win right now, set 2"? is displayed, it is suggested that the set value is set to "2".

Next, it is assumed that the look-ahead zone effect pattern 3 is determined as the look-ahead zone effect pattern when executing the fourth variable display after the occurrence of the start-up prize in the first start-up prize slot (see FIGS. 20-28). Then, as shown in FIG. 20-42(E), the look-ahead zone effect based on the look-ahead zone effect pattern 3 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 20-42(E), the character 121IW110 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the line of the character 121IW110 is "If you win now, set '3'?" ] is displayed.

In addition, when a big win is achieved in the third variation display, the look-ahead zone effect is terminated. In this case, "If you win right now, set "3"? is displayed, it is suggested that the set value is set to "3". Also, in this example, even if the big hit does not occur in the third variation display, the look-ahead zone effect is terminated (thus, in this case, a so-called fake look-ahead zone effect is executed. ).

It should be noted that FIGS. 20-41 and 20-42 are examples, and for example, even if the second variable display is performed after the start winning, in FIG. In some cases, a look-ahead zone effect suggesting a set value of "2" or "3" is executed (see FIGS. 20-28). Also, for example, even if the variable display is executed for the third time after the starting prize is won, in FIG. (See Figures 20-28). Also, for example, even if the fourth variable display is executed after the start winning, the look-ahead zone effect suggesting the setting value "1" or "2" is executed at a low rate in FIG. 20-42 (E). (See Figures 20-28).

In addition, in this example, when the first variable display is executed after the starting prize is won, the look-ahead zone effect is executed based on the initial effect pattern, and the character display 121IW111 of "Entering the zone!" is displayed. However, even when the first variable display is executed, the setting values “1” to “3” are suggested in the same manner as in FIGS. 20-41 (C) to 20-42 (E) can be configured to run

Also, in this example, a case was shown in which a set value is suggested assuming that a predetermined condition has been established based on the occurrence of a big win during execution of the look-ahead zone performance, but the mode is not limited to this. For example, a setting value may be suggested assuming that a predetermined condition has been established by displaying a predetermined character or emitting light from a lamp or LED during execution of the look-ahead zone effect. can be considered.

In addition, in this example, the case where the look-ahead zone effect is executed over a plurality of times of variable display is shown, but this is not limited to such an aspect, and for example, a setting value is suggested in the effect executed during one variable display. may be configured as possible. For example, during one variable display, the image display device 5 displays a gauge display in which the indicator moves as time passes, and at which stage the indicator is in the gauge display, some performance condition is satisfied ( For example, it may be configured such that setting values are suggested based on winning a battle or clearing a mission.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-41 and 20-42, when the look-ahead zone effect is executed in a plurality of times of variable display, "If you hit now, set '1'" for each variable display. ? ' or 'If I win right now, setting '2'? Although the case where the current set value is suggested by displaying characters such as ", the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, during one variable display, "If you win right now, set '1'? ' or 'If I win right now, setting '2'? ”, etc., in order, and when a big hit occurs at the end of the variable display, the contents of the finally displayed character display may suggest the current set value. good. For example, "If I win right now, setting '2'? is displayed, and if the variable display ends and a big win occurs, it is suggested that the set value is "2", and "If you win now, set "3"? ] is displayed, the setting value "3" may be suggested when the variable display ends and a big win occurs. Further, when the character display is sequentially switched during one variable display, for example, the character display may be switched at the timing of the occurrence of the advance notice effect or the timing of the development of the ready-to-win effect. good. Further, for example, in the case of variable display accompanied by pseudo-runs, the character display may be switched at the timing of re-variation.

Next, a description will be given of an effect aspect of the in-reach suggestive effect. FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the mode of the suggestive effect during reach. In addition, in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44, it is assumed that the presentation mode changes in the order of (A), (B), (C), . . .

As shown in FIG. 20-43(A), when starting variable display of decorative patterns, super reach D is executed as the type of super reach based on the fact that super reach is specified in the variation pattern. (see FIGS. 20-25), and icon pattern 5 is determined as the icon pattern (see FIGS. 20-26(A) to (D)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-43(B), the left and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (symbol "7" in this example), and normal reach occurs. Next, when it is time to start super reach, as shown in FIG. 20-43(C), the panel image A121IW115 corresponding to super reach A is displayed at the top of the image display device 5, and the panel image B121IW116 corresponding to super reach B is displayed. , a panel image C121IW117 corresponding to super reach C, and a panel image C121IW118 corresponding to super reach D are displayed in an overlapping state. Further, based on the fact that icon pattern 5 is determined, panel image B121IW116 displays icon image "●" 121IW119, panel image C121IW117 displays icon image "▴" 121IW120, panel image D121IW118 displays An icon image "*" 121IW121 is displayed.

Next, when the player's operation of the push button 31B is detected once, the top panel image A121IW115 is erased and the panel image B121IW116 is displayed at the top, as shown in FIG. 20-43(D). .

Next, when the player repeatedly hits the push button 31B and the number of repeated hits reaches a first predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the leading panel image B121IW116 is erased as shown in FIG. The panel image C121IW117 is displayed at the top.

Next, when the player repeatedly hits the push button 31B and the number of repeated hits reaches a second predetermined number (for example, 20 times), the top panel image C121IW117 is erased as shown in FIG. Only the panel image D121IW118 is displayed.

After that, when it comes time to develop super reach, as shown in FIG. As shown in 44(H), an effect in which a super reach D is developed is executed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44, the icon image "*" 121IW121 is displayed on the panel image D121IW118 that is finally displayed at the top, so that the current set value is displayed. It is suggested that the possibility of being "3" is high.

The examples shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44 show the case where the execution of Super Reach D is determined. For example, when the execution of Super Reach A is determined, the push button 31B, the panel image A121IW115 shown in FIG. A display is made in a mode of expanding to the entire screen, and an effect of a mode of developing to Super Reach A is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of Super Reach B is determined, even if the push button 31B is operated, the panel image B121IW116 shown in FIG. First, when it comes to the development timing of super reach, the panel image B121IW116 is displayed in a mode of expanding to the entire display screen of the image display device 5, and the mode of development of super reach B is executed. Further, for example, when the execution of Super Reach C is determined, even if the push button 31B is operated, the panel image C121IW117 shown in FIG. First, when it comes to the development timing of super reach C, the panel image C121IW117 is displayed in an enlarged manner over the entire display screen of the image display device 5, and the effect of the development of super reach C is executed.

Further, for example, even though the execution of Super Reach D has been determined, the player does not operate the push button 31B at all or does not repeatedly hit the push button 31B until the second predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 20-44(F). It is conceivable that the display may not change until only the panel image D121IW118 is displayed. In this case, in this example, if the push button 31B is operated at least once, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are forcibly erased, and the panel image D121IW118 is displayed at the top. , develops into Super Reach D. However, if the push button 31B has not been operated even once and the panel image A121IW115 remains displayed at the top, in this example, the panel image A121IW115 remains displayed at the top. Develops into Super Reach A.

It should be noted that the super reach D may be forcibly developed even when the push button 31B is not operated even once. Also, even if the execution of Super Reach D is determined, if the state where only the panel image 121IW118 is displayed does not change, the panel image displayed at the top is finally displayed. It may also be configured to develop into super reach B or super reach C as a result.

In addition, for example, if the player does not operate the push button 31B, it may be configured to develop into super ready-to-win, which has nothing to do with the suggestion of the set value.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44, the icon images 121IW119-121 are displayed and the in-reach suggesting effect is executed. When it is determined that the effect is not to be executed, only the panel images are displayed in FIGS. 20-43(C) to 20-44(G), and the icon images are not displayed.

In this example, when the in-reach suggesting effect is not executed during super reach, the icon image is not displayed at all, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the suggesting effect during reach is not executed, it may be configured so that it has nothing to do with the suggestion of the setting value by displaying an item image that has nothing to do with the setting value in each panel image. .

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44, the panel images are erased one by one in accordance with the operation of the push button 31B, so that the stages of the super ready-to-win effect are displayed one by one. Although the case where the set value is suggested in the production of the rising mode is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when displaying a meter display that increases the level of the meter step by step according to the player's operation, the icon image or telop corresponding to the set value is displayed to suggest the set value. good too. Also, for example, the ready-to-win effect itself such as super ready-to-win does not change step by step, and only the icon image corresponding to the set value and the telop display change step by step according to the player's operation. may Further, for example, it is not always necessary to accompany the player's operation, and the icon image or telop display corresponding to the set value may be configured to change step by step regardless of the operation. Conceivable.

In addition, for example, it is also possible to associate the in-reach suggestive effect and the display result of the variable display as shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44. For example, when the during-reach suggestive effects as shown in FIGS. 20-43 and 20-44 are executed, if a big hit occurs in the variable display, the set values suggested by the during-reach suggestive effects are determined, Alternatively, it may be configured to determine that it is equal to or higher than the set value suggested by the suggesting production during reach.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 20-43(C) to 20-44(E), the icon images of the panel images other than the panel image displayed at the top are displayed so as to be visible. Although the case is shown, the configuration is not limited to such a mode, and only the panel image displayed at the top may be configured to display the icon image. In this case, for example, in FIG. 20-43(C), since the panel image A121IW115 is displayed at the top, all the panel images B121IW116 to D121IW118 are displayed with no icon images displayed. 20-43(D), when the panel image A121IW115 is erased and the panel image B121IW116 is displayed at the top, the icon image 121IW119 is displayed on the panel image B121IW116. 20-44(E), when the panel image B121IW116 is erased and the panel image C121IW117 is displayed at the top, the icon image 121IW120 is displayed on the panel image C121IW117. 20-44(F), when the panel image C121IW117 is erased and only the panel image D121IW118 is displayed, the icon image 121IW121 is displayed on the panel image D121IW118. good.

Further, in this example, for example, although the execution of Super Reach D is determined, the player does not hit the push button 31B repeatedly until the second predetermined number, and only the panel image D121IW118 is displayed. If there is no change, if the push button 31B is operated at least once, panel image B121IW116 and panel image C121IW117 are forcibly erased, and panel image D121IW118 is displayed at the top. However, if the icon image is displayed only for the panel image displayed at the top as described above, there is no timing for the panel image B121IW116 or the panel image C121IW117 to be displayed at the top. The icon images of the image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 may not be displayed. In addition, even if the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are forcibly erased, the panel image B121IW116 and the panel image C121IW117 are displayed in order for a very short time (for example, 1 second) so that the The icon image may be displayed on the panel image B121IW116 or the panel image C121IW117 for a period of time (for example, 1 second).

In addition, in this characteristic part 121IW, the character effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in such a manner that it is difficult to recognize the suggesting effect during the big hit. The display is also executed in such a manner that it is difficult to recognize the suggesting effect during the big win. That is, the error display is displayed with priority over the suggesting effect during the big hit (or the suggesting effect before the game or the suggesting effect during the game). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the occurrence of an error. In addition, when a predetermined performance (for example, a specific mode of performance among fanfare performances) that can be executed at the same time as the suggestive performance during the big win is provided, and the predetermined performance is in a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestive performance during the big win. In this case, priority may be given to the suggesting effect during the big hit. Specifically, when the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect is in a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the image displayed by the suggestive effect during the big win, the effect is displayed by the suggestive effect during the big win. Images may be preferentially displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the suggestive effect during the big hit.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 121IW, the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and the decorative pattern is variably displayed by driving the drum-shaped movable body on which the decorative pattern is arranged. (that is, it may be applied to a so-called drum-type game machine). Alternatively, by driving a belt-like movable body having a decorative pattern on its surface, the decorative pattern may be variably displayed (that is, it may be applied to a so-called belt reel type game machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel type gaming machine, when the initial fluctuation starts after the setting is changed, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation different from normal (or characteristic behavior may occur). Therefore, in the initial variation after the setting change, a light guide plate rendering that makes the movable body difficult to see at the start of variation may be executed (or the execution ratio may be increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 121IW, the character effect and the light guide plate effect are configured to reduce the visibility of the effect suggesting during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestive effect, and the during-game suggestive effect may be reduced by executing the accessory effect and the light guide plate effect. Also in this case, visibility may be lowered at a high rate when an undesirable suggestion is given to the player. For example, when an even initial outcome is displayed, when the pre-game suggestive effect of the first effect mode is executed, or when the suggestive effect during the game of the first effect mode is executed, the visibility of these is reduced. It is also possible to increase the ratio of execution of the character effect in which the movable member moves and the light guide plate effect in which characters and pictures are displayed on the light guide plate. In addition, not only the performance of the role and the performance of the light guide plate, but also the control of outputting a predetermined sound, the control of vibrating the movable member and the stick controller 31A, and the control of emitting light from a decorative light emitter such as a decorative LED in a predetermined manner. , the player's attention may be directed elsewhere, and the visibility of the initial appearance effect, pre-game suggestive effect, and during-game suggestive effect may be reduced (or made difficult to notice).

Also, in addition to the setting suggestive effect of the characteristic part 121IW, simultaneous effect executed based on the measurement result (measurement result using the measurement timer set at power-on and the real-time clock) can be executed in a specific mode. may suggest the setting.

In addition, depending on the number of times that the variable display is performed continuously without the pending memory becoming 0, or the number of times that the starting prize exceeding the maximum number of pending memories occurs, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a predetermined image display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Further, based on detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B during a predetermined operation effective period, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a predetermined image display control, a predetermined sound output control, a predetermined light emission control of the lamp, etc.) may be executed.

Although the characteristic portion 121IW has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention may be applied to the present invention. included.

(Modification 1)
For example, in the characteristic part 121IW, the security cover 121IW500A is fixed to the outer frame 121IW001a. good too. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-45(A) and 20-45(B), a security cover 121IW500B consisting of a short piece 121IW500Ba and a long piece 121IW500Bb is attached to the substrate case 121IW201, for example. Then, the right end of the long piece 121IW500Bb slides in the horizontal direction between a covering position covering the right side of the board case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting switch 121IW052 and a covering release position on the right side of the covering position. Set so that it can be moved.

On the other hand, when the game machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the security cover 121IW500B is slid to the right side with respect to the board case 121IW201, and set through the through hole 121IW500Bc formed in the left part of the long piece 121IW500Bb. The key 121IW051 and the setting switch 121IW052 may be made operable. That is, in the first modification, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the security cover 121IW500B (long piece 121IW500Bb) covers the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052, and the horizontal direction with respect to the board case 121IW201 is closed. The pachinko game machine 1 is maintained in a regulated state by regulating the slide movement to. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open, the security cover 121IW500B is slid to the right with respect to the board case 121IW201 to release the covering of the setting key 121IW051 and the setting switch 121IW052. The pachinko game machine 1 can be brought into a state in which the restricted state can be released (changed to the permitted state).

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 20-45(A) and 20-45(B), when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the projection dimension of the security cover 121IW500B from the substrate case 121IW201 is L1. On the other hand, when the game machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the security cover 121IW500B is slid with respect to the board case 121IW201, thereby extending the projection dimension of the security cover 121IW500B from the board case 121IW201 to the length L2. (L2>L1).

In other words, as shown in FIG. 20-46(A), when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened by rotating around a predetermined rotation axis, the projection dimension of the security cover 121IW500B from the board case 121IW201 is By sliding with respect to the board case 121IW201 until the length L2 is reached (putting the pachinko game machine 1 in a permissible state), a pachinko game can be played by operating the setting key 121IW051 or the setting changeover switch 121IW052. The setting value of machine 1 can be changed. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, unless the pachinko game machine 1 is slid (unless the pachinko game machine 1 is changed to the restricted state), the security cover 121IW500B comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 121IW001a, making it impossible to close the game machine frame 121IW003. It's becoming

Therefore, in the first modification, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 121IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 121IW052, that is, to prevent the gaming machine frame 121IW003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operating portion, thereby improving security.

In the state where the game machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 121IW500Ba is arranged between the outer frame 121IW001a and the game machine frame 121IW003, thereby restricting movement in the horizontal direction from the cover position. However, the security cover 121IW500B may be moved in the horizontal direction as long as the security cover 121IW500B covers the setting key 121IW051 and the setting switch 121IW052. .

(Modification 2)
Furthermore, as a form in which the security cover is provided on the gaming machine frame 121IW003 side, as shown in FIGS. The right side of the substrate case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is rotated about the vertical pivot 121IW500Cd provided on the back side of the frame 121IW003 to cover the right side of the substrate case 121IW201 and from the covering position. It may be rotatably pivoted between the covering release position. In such a case, when the game machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the front end of the short piece 121IW500Ca is locked by the locking portion 121IW500Cc provided on the right side of the outer frame 121IW001a, and the long piece 121IW500Cb is switched to the setting key 121IW051. The switch 121IW052 may be restricted from rotating to the back side from the state where the switch 121IW052 is covered from the back side.

When the game machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting switch 121IW052 are opened by rotating the security cover 121IW500C with respect to the substrate case 121IW201 around the pivot 121IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view). can be made operable by releasing the covered state. That is, in the present modified example 2, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the security cover 121IW500C (long piece 121IW500Cb) covers the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052, and rotation is restricted. Thus, the pachinko game machine 1 is maintained in the restricted state. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open, the security cover 121IW500C is rotated with respect to the substrate case 121IW201 around the pivot 121IW500Cd (counterclockwise in plan view) to turn the setting key 121IW051 and the setting switch 121IW052. By releasing the covered state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be brought into a state in which the restricted state can be released (changed to the permitted state).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20-48(A), the security cover 121IW500C in the present modified example 2 rotates around the pivot 121IW500Cd (puts the pachinko machine 1 in the allowable state), thereby opening the game hall. The setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed by the store clerk or the like operating the setting key 121IW051 or the setting changeover switch 121IW052. On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state, as shown in FIG. If the 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are not covered (if the pachinko game machine 1 is not changed to the restricted state), the security cover 121IW500C comes into contact with the front end of the outer frame 121IW001a, closing the game machine frame 121IW003. has become impossible.

Therefore, in the second modification, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine frame 121IW003 from being closed while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the allowable state. It is possible to prevent forgetting to cover the changeover switch 121IW052, that is, to prevent the gaming machine frame 121IW003 from being closed without restricting the operation of the operating portion, thereby improving security.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the characterizing portion 121IW, an example has been illustrated in which the set values of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed by opening the game machine frame 121IW003, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the glass door frame The setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 may be changed by opening 121IW003a. In addition, when the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed by opening the glass door frame 121IW003a in this way, as shown in FIGS. , a through hole 121IW003b is formed in the lower part of the frame 121IW003 for a game machine, and the setting key 121IW051 and the setting switch 121IW052 can be operated through the through hole 121IW003b. In this case, the mounting surface of the IC or the like on the main board 11 is arranged facing the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are arranged on the opposite side of the main board 11 from the mounting surface. placed on the face.

When the setting key 121IW051 and the setting switch 121IW052 can be operated through the through hole 121IW003b in this way, a door 121IW003c capable of opening and closing the through hole 121IW003b is provided. The operation of the setting key 121IW051 and the setting switch 121IW052 may be restricted. As shown in FIGS. 20-49(B) and 20-49(C), when the door 121IW003c is provided on the front side of the game machine frame 121IW003, the door 121IW003a is closed by closing the glass door frame 121IW003a. 121IW003c is sandwiched between the glass door frame 121IW003a and the gaming machine frame 121IW003 so that the setting key 121IW051 and the setting switch 121IW052 are illegally operated when the glass door frame 121IW003a is closed. can be strongly prevented, and security can be improved.

(Modification 4)
In this characteristic portion 121IW, a case is shown in which the set value is suggested by changing the performance stage after the end of the small winning game and switching to the background image according to the changed performance stage, but it changes after the end of the small winning game. The setting value may be suggested by switching the pattern table and executing a series of setting value suggestion effects over a plurality of variable displays. Modification 4 in which the variation pattern table is switched after the end of the small winning game will be described below.

In the modification 4, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103), when ending the small winning game, specifically, in the small winning end processing (step S120) in the special symbol process processing, A post-small-hit flag indicating that the small-hit game has ended is set.

FIG. 20-50 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in Modification 4. FIG. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the post-small hit flag is set (step 121IWS1101). If the after-small-hit flag is not set (that is, after the end of the small-hit game), the CPU 103 uses a table for determining the variation pattern as whether it is a big-hit, whether it is a small-hit, and whether it is a big-hit. A variation pattern determination table corresponding to the type and small hit type is selected (step 121IWS1102). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS1107.

If the after-small-hit flag is set (that is, after the end of the small-hit game), the CPU 103 sets the value of the post-small-hit number counter to 1 for counting the number of fluctuations after the end of the small-hit game. Add (step 121IWS1103). Further, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern determination table for after a small hit as a table for determining a variation pattern (step 121IWS1104).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the after-small-hit number counter is a predetermined value (eg, 3) (step 121IWS1105). If the value of the after-small-hit number counter does not reach the predetermined value, the process proceeds to step 121IWS1107. If the value of the after-small-hit number counter is equal to the predetermined value, the CPU 103 resets the after-small-hit flag and resets (0 clears) the after-small-hit number counter (step 121IWS1106). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS1107.

Then, the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern determination table selected in steps 121IWS1102 and 1104 to perform lottery processing based on random numbers to determine the variation pattern (step 121IWS1107).

In addition, in the fourth modification, by executing the processing of steps 121IWS1103 to S1107, after the end of the small hit game, until the fluctuation display for a predetermined value (for example, three times of fluctuation display) is completed, is determined. In this example, it is assumed that a fixed variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds is determined as a variation pattern exclusively for after a small hit.

It should be noted that, not only in the mode shown in this example, for example, even before ending the variation display for a predetermined value after the end of the small winning game, when the big winning or small winning It may be configured to determine a winning variation pattern.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 121IWS1108).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a variable time timer formed in the RAM 102 to a value corresponding to the variable time corresponding to the selected variable pattern (step 121IWS1109). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S112) (step 121IWS1110).

FIG. 20-51 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in Modification 4. FIG. Incidentally, in Modification 4, the processing of steps 121IWS601-S602 is the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 20-24. When the stop pattern of the decoration pattern is determined in step 121IWS602, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command read out in step 121IWS601 is a variation pattern exclusively for after a small hit (step 121IWS631). In the case of the variation pattern only after the small hit, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect counter to 1 for counting the number of effects of the post-small hit suggestion effect that suggests the set value after the end of the small win game. Add (step 121IWS632).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the value of the effect counter after addition is 1 (step 121IWS633). If the value of the performance number counter is not 1 (that is, if the variation display is to be performed for the second and subsequent times after the end of the small winning game), the process proceeds directly to step 121IWS636. If the value of the performance number counter is 1 (that is, if the first variation display is performed after the end of the small hit game), the performance control CPU 120 determines the type of suggested performance after the small hit. A lottery process based on random numbers is performed using the post-hit suggestion performance determination table, and the type of post-small hit suggestion performance is determined (step 121IWS634). Then, the effect control CPU 120 stores the determined type of suggested effect after the small hit in the storage area provided in the RAM 122 (step 121IWS635).

FIG. 20-52 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the post-small hit suggestion effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 20-52, in this example, there are three post-small hit suggestive effects 1 to 3 as types of post-small hit suggestive effects. In this example, the suggestive effect after the small hit fluctuates for the first time, the second time, and the third time over a plurality of fluctuation displays (for example, in a total of 90 seconds of three fluctuation displays fixed at 30 seconds after the small win). It is configured as a series of effects executed in such a manner that the story unfolds in order as the display is executed. Of these, the post-small hit suggestion production 1 is a production that suggests that a series of productions are executed and finally the set value is “1” (for example, a battle production is executed over multiple fluctuations, and the final third fluctuation A character reminiscent of the set value “1” wins the battle). In addition, the post-small hit suggestion production 2 is a production that suggests that a series of productions are executed and the final set value is “2” (for example, a battle production is executed over multiple fluctuations, and the final third fluctuation is set A character reminiscent of the value “2” wins the battle). In addition, the post-small hit suggestion production 3 is a production that suggests that a series of productions are executed and finally the set value is “3” (for example, a battle production is executed over multiple fluctuations, and the final third fluctuation is set A character reminiscent of the value “3” wins the battle).

As shown in FIG. 20-52, in this example, when the setting value is "1", the ratio of selecting the post-small hit suggestion effect 1 is high, and when the setting value is "2", after the small hit The ratio of selecting the suggestive performance 2 is high, and when the set value is "3", the ratio of selecting the suggestive performance 3 after the small win is high.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern and the type of suggested effect after the determined small hit (step 121IWS636). In this case, if it is the first variation display after the end of the small winning game (in the case of Y at step 121IWS633), the post-small winning suggestive effect determined at step 121IWS634 and stored in the RAM 122 at step 121IWS635 is determined according to the type. Select process table. In addition, if it is the second variation display after the end of the small win game (N in step 121 IWS 633), the kind of post-small win suggestive effect determined in the first variation display after the end of the small win game is Since it should be stored in the RAM 122, a process table corresponding to the type of post-small hit suggestion performance stored in the RAM 122 is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS617. The processing after step 121IWS617 is the same as those shown in FIGS. 20-24.

On the other hand, if it is not a variation pattern exclusively for after a small hit (N in step 121IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 resets (0 clears) the effect counter (step 121IWS637). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS603. The processes after step 121IWS603 are the same as those shown in FIGS. 20-24.

In this example, after the end of the small-hit game, the variable display is fixed for 30 seconds over three fluctuations, and a series of post-small-hit suggestive effects are executed for a total of 90 seconds. The number of times of variation and the period to be executed are not limited to those shown in this example. For example, after the end of the small winning game, the variable display fixed for 20 seconds is performed over 4 variations, and a series of suggestive performances after the small winning may be executed for a total of 80 seconds.

As described above, the characteristic portion 121IW includes the following first invention. In other words, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set set value. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes performing display control of effects based on set values, and executing processing for displaying character images of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing can be considered, for example, when the special pattern fluctuates, but it may be regular (at the time of all fluctuations, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.), or irregularly (such as when winning a random number lottery). It states that there may be However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the presentation effect in the gaming machine that is configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value. . Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the first invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means that can be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") (for example, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 121IWS029) and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can execute control related to the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
A special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) that is controllable to a special state (for example, a small game state) different from the advantageous state,
Based on being controlled to the special state, a specific effect execution means (for example, a part that executes steps 121IWS1008 to S1011 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, effect by changing the effect stage) with
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect at different execution ratios according to the set value (for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets in step 121IWS 1009, as shown in FIGS. 20-38) Determines whether or not to change the production stage at a different rate depending on the value)
According to this feature, in a game machine configured to be able to execute control of an advantageous state based on a set value, control to a special state is performed by a specific effect can be made to pay attention to, and the production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the first invention,
The special state control means can control a plurality of types of special states (for example, a small winning game state based on the small winning types A to C),
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect in a manner suggesting the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. , a setting value of "2" is suggested by changing to production stage B, and a setting value of "3" is suggested by changing to production stage C),
Depending on the type of the controlled special state, the reliability of the suggestion of the set value by the execution of the specific effect differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. Suggestion of set values by the production stage changed later has the highest reliability, and suggestion of set values by the production stage changed after the end of the small win game based on the small win type A has the lowest reliability. ing)
According to this configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the first invention,
The specific effect execution means is
There are cases where a specific effect is executed and cases where it is not executed depending on the mode of transitioning the effect state after ending the special state (for example, as shown in FIGS. there is),
Depending on the setting value that has been set, the rate at which the specific effect is executed differs depending on the manner in which the effect state is shifted after the special state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. ~ Depending on which of "3", the ratio of determination of no change in production stage or change (change to production stage A, change to production stage B, change to production stage C) will be different)
According to this configuration, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the first invention,
The specific effect execution means has a different ratio of executing the specific effect depending on the mode of transition to the specific effect state among the plurality of types of effect states after the special state is ended, according to the set value (for example, FIG. As shown in 20-38, it may be changed to production stage C only when the set value is "3")
According to this configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the first invention,
Variable display pattern determination means (eg, game control microcomputer 100) for determining variable display patterns using variable display pattern determination data (eg, variation pattern determination table) for determining variable display patterns (eg, variation patterns) Step 121 of executing IWS1101 to S1107),
Variable display execution means for executing variable display according to the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion that executes steps 171 to 173 in the effect control CPU 120),
The variable display pattern determination means determines the variable display pattern by switching the variable display pattern determination data after finishing the special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the variable display pattern in steps 121IWS1103 to S1107 when Y in step 121IWS1101). ),
The specific effect execution means executes a series of specific effects in a manner suggesting the set value over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 121IWS632 to S636 when Y in step 121IWS631). )
According to this configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the first invention,
Information output means (for example, step 121IWS031, S108 in game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set and ,
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control a portion for executing steps 121IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906 in the CPU 120,
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect in the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during the game, a suggestive effect during the jackpot in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) It is possible to execute a previous suggesting effect, a suggesting effect during the game, a suggesting effect during the jackpot),
When the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can By executing steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggesting effect and during-game suggesting effect by the third effect mode and the suggesting effect during the jackpot by the fourth effect mode are not executed)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine that is configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set value, it is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game. can do.

In addition, the characteristic portion 121IW includes a second invention described below. In other words, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set set value. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes performing display control of effects based on set values, and executing processing for displaying character images of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing can be considered, for example, when the special pattern fluctuates, but it may be regular (at the time of all fluctuations, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.), or irregularly (such as when winning a random number lottery). It states that there may be However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the presentation effect in the gaming machine that is configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value. . Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means that can be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") (for example, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 121IWS029) and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can execute control related to the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a small hit), a specific effect execution means (for example, in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, effect by changing the effect stage) over a plurality of variable displays step 121 IWS1008 to S1011)),
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect at different execution ratios according to the set value (for example, the effect control CPU 120 sets in step 121IWS 1009, as shown in FIGS. 20-38) Determines whether or not to change the production stage at a different rate depending on the value)
According to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of an advantageous state based on a set value, a specific effect is displayed over a plurality of variable displays. can be executed, the production effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the second invention,
A special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can be controlled to a plurality of types of special states (for example, small hit types A to C) different from the advantageous state.
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect in a manner suggesting the set value (for example, as shown in FIG. , a setting value of "2" is suggested by changing to production stage B, and a setting value of "3" is suggested by changing to production stage C),
Depending on the type of the controlled special state, the reliability of the suggestion of the set value by the execution of the specific effect is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. Suggestion of set values by the production stage changed later has the highest reliability, and suggestion of set values by the production stage changed after the end of the small win game based on the small win type A has the lowest reliability. ing)
According to this configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the second invention,
A special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) that is controllable to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state is provided,
The specific effect execution means is
Depending on the manner in which the production state is shifted after the special state ends, there are cases where the specific production is executed and cases where it is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-38, when the production stage is changed and when it is not changed) ),
Depending on the setting value that has been set, the rate at which the specific effect is executed differs depending on the aspect of transitioning the effect state after the special state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-38, the setting value “1” ~ Depending on which of "3", the ratio of determination of no change in production stage or change (change to production stage A, change to production stage B, change to production stage C) will be different)
According to this configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the second invention,
The specific effect execution means has a different ratio of executing the specific effect depending on the mode of transition to the specific effect state among the plurality of types of effect states after the special state is ended, according to the set value (for example, FIG. As shown in 20-38, it may be changed to production stage C only when the set value is "3")
According to this configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the second invention,
A special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps S118 to S120 in the game control microcomputer 100) that is controllable to a special state (for example, a small winning game state) different from the advantageous state is provided,
Variable display pattern determination means (eg, game control microcomputer 100) for determining variable display patterns using variable display pattern determination data (eg, variation pattern determination table) for determining variable display patterns (eg, variation patterns) Step 121 of executing IWS1101 to S1107),
Variable display execution means for executing variable display according to the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion that executes steps 171 to 173 in the effect control CPU 120),
The variable display pattern determination means determines the variable display pattern by switching the variable display pattern determination data after finishing the special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, when Y in step 121IWS1101, step 121IWS1103 ~ execute S1107),
The specific effect execution means executes a series of specific effects in a manner suggesting the set value over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 121IWS632 to S636 when Y in step 121IWS631). )
According to this configuration, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the second invention,
Information output means (for example, step 121IWS031, S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set and ,
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control A part that executes steps 121IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906 in the CPU 120),
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect and a suggestive effect during the game according to the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during the jackpot according to the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game according to the first effect mode) It is possible to execute a previous suggesting effect, a suggesting effect during a game, a suggesting effect during a big hit, and
When the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can By executing steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggesting effect and during-game suggesting effect by the third effect mode and the suggesting effect during the jackpot by the fourth effect mode are not executed)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. can do.

In addition, the characteristic portion 121IW includes a third invention described below. In other words, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set set value. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes performing display control of effects based on set values, and executing processing for displaying character images of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing can be considered, for example, when the special pattern fluctuates, but it may be regular (at the time of all fluctuations, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.), or irregularly (such as when winning a random number lottery). It states that there may be However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the presentation effect in the gaming machine that is configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value. . Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means that can be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") (for example, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 121IWS029) and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can execute control related to the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
With production execution means (for example, production control CPU 120) capable of executing production,
The production executing means is
A specific effect (for example, a look-ahead zone effect) can be executed for a predetermined period of time,
It is possible to execute an effect so that a set value is suggested when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the occurrence of a big hit) during the execution of the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-28, the look-ahead zone effect If a big win occurs during the execution of the look-ahead zone performance by pattern 1, it is suggested that the set value is ``1'', and if a big win occurs during the execution of the look-ahead zone performance by the look-ahead zone performance pattern 2, the set value is ``2''. , and if a big hit occurs during the execution of the look-ahead zone effect pattern 3, it is suggested that the set value is "3")
According to the game machine characterized in that, according to this characteristic, the effect can be enhanced in the game machine configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the third invention,
The effect executing means can execute the effect so that the suggested setting values differ depending on at what timing during the execution of the specific effect the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-28). In addition, when the set value “1” is suggested in the second variation look-ahead zone effect and the hit is achieved, the set value “1” is highly accurate, and the set value “2” is set in the third variation look-ahead zone effect. is suggested and hits a big hit, the set value is "2", which is high accuracy, and when the set value "3" is suggested in the fourth variation look-ahead zone production and hits a big hit, the set value is "3". ” with high accuracy)
According to this configuration, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the third invention,
Determining means for determining whether to control in an advantageous state (for example, a part that executes step 121IWS110 in the game control microcomputer 100),
Before the determination by the determination means, a determination means for determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a portion that executes step S101 in the game control microcomputer 100),
The effect execution means can execute a specific effect based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform pre-reading based on the symbol designation command in the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIGS. 20-20). (Determines execution of zone production)
According to this configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the third invention,
Information output means (for example, step 121IWS031, S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set and ,
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control A part that executes steps 121IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906 in the CPU 120),
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect and a suggestive effect during the game according to the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during the jackpot according to the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game according to the first effect mode) It is possible to execute a previous suggesting effect, a suggesting effect during a game, a suggesting effect during a big hit, and
When the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can By executing steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggesting effect and during-game suggesting effect by the third effect mode and the suggesting effect during the jackpot by the fourth effect mode are not executed)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. can do.

In addition, the characteristic portion 121IW includes a fourth invention described below. In other words, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set set value. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes performing display control of effects based on set values, and executing processing for displaying character images of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing can be considered, for example, when the special pattern fluctuates, but it may be regular (at the time of all fluctuations, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.), or irregularly (such as when winning a random number lottery). It states that there may be However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the presentation effect in the gaming machine that is configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value. . Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means that can be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") (for example, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 121IWS029) and
Advantageous state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can execute control related to the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
Action detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting actions of the player;
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, steps 121IWS603 to S605 in the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a suggestive effect that suggests the set value (for example, a suggestive effect during reach), and a suggestive effect during reach at step 121IWS616 A portion that selects the corresponding process table and executes step 121IWS618, S805),
The suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect in a mode of changing a set value to be suggested in response to detection of the player's motion a plurality of times by the motion detection means (for example, effect control CPU 120 executes steps 121IWS806-S817)
According to the game machine characterized in that, according to this characteristic, the effect can be enhanced in the game machine configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the fourth invention,
A ready-to-win effect execution means (for example, step 121IWS616 in the effect control CPU 120 for selecting a process table corresponding to super-reach and executing steps 121IWS618 and S805),
It is possible to execute an effect so that the ready-to-win effect to be executed changes in stages (for example, as shown in FIGS. to erase the panel images one by one),
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect by changing the set value to be suggested at the timing when the ready-to-win effect to be executed changes step by step (for example, FIGS. 20-43(C) to 20- As shown in 44(F), the panel images displaying the icon images 121IW119-120 suggesting the set values are erased one by one.)
According to this configuration, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means may or may not execute the suggestive effect when executing the effect so that the ready-to-win effect to be executed changes in stages (for example, FIGS. 20-26 and 20- 27, there are cases where icon patterns 2 to 9 with icon images displayed are selected, and icon pattern 1 with no icon images displayed is selected.)
According to this configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the fourth invention,
Depending on the combination of the set value suggested by the suggestive effect and the ready-to-win effect, the reliability of the ready-to-reach effect differs (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-26 (A), when the set value is "1" When icon pattern 2 is selected, it is confirmed that the game is a big hit.)
According to this configuration, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the fourth invention,
Depending on the combination of the set value suggested by the suggestive effect and the ready-to-reach effect, the reliability of the set value suggested by the suggested effect differs (for example, as shown in FIGS. 20-26 and 200-27, super When an icon image with icon pattern 9 is displayed in reach, the expectation for the set value “3” is high)
According to this configuration, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the fourth invention,
Information output means (for example, step 121IWS031, S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set prepared,
Suggestion production execution means,
Based on the set value information input from the information output means, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect, a game-in-progress suggestive effect, a big-hit suggestive effect) (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 120 121IWS509-S515, S704-S709, S901-S906),
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect and a suggestive effect during the game according to the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during the jackpot according to the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game according to the first effect mode) It is possible to execute a previous suggesting effect, a suggesting effect during the game, a suggesting effect during the jackpot),
When the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can By executing steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906, the pre-game suggesting effect and during-game suggesting effect by the third effect mode and the suggesting effect during the jackpot by the fourth effect mode are not executed)
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine configured to be able to execute control of an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. can do.

In addition, the characteristic portion 121IW includes a fifth invention described below. In other words, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set set value. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. In JP-A-2010-200902, a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is sent from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the change stop command It is described that, based on the values, three types of presentation patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, are displayed. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value specifying command) is not normal. In a game machine that is configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set values, there is a risk that interest in the game may rather be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means that can be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") (for example, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 121IWS029) and
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100),
Information output means (for example, step 121IWS031, S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set and ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control A part that executes steps 121IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906 in the CPU 120),
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestive effect executing means sets a predetermined set value that is less advantageous for the player among the set values of the plurality of stages. As a thing, it is possible to execute the suggested effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a part that executes steps 121IWS512, S707, and S904)
According to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the fifth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 121IWS031 and S108 to transmit the set value command when the power is turned on and when the variation starts. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the setting value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means performs, as the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect with a high degree of specificity of the set value (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect and a suggestive effect during the game according to the third effect mode, and a jackpot during the fourth effect mode). Suggestion performance) and a second suggestion performance with a low degree of specificity of the set value (for example, a pre-game suggestion performance by the first performance mode, a game suggestion performance, and a big hit suggestion performance) can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the fifth invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect determination table, a during-game suggestive effect determination table, a jackpot during a suggestive effect determination table) for determining the suggestive effect execution mode, the suggestive effect execution mode is determined. Suggestion effect determination means to be determined (for example, step 121IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in the effect control CPU 120 is provided),
The suggestive effect determining means includes:
Using the decision data according to the setting value set among the plurality of types of decision data, the execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122 Step 121IWS510, S705 and S902 are executed based on the set values stored in the
If the set value information is not input normally, the decision data corresponding to a predetermined set value (for example, the set value “1”) is used to determine the execution mode of the suggested effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 121IWS512, S707 and S904 based on the set value "1")
According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in data capacity.

It should be noted that, in the present characterizing portion 121IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggestive effect" is a concept that includes determining whether or not to execute the suggestive effect and also determining the effect mode of the suggestive effect. be.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means performs a suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect or According to such a configuration, it is possible to make players interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and to start the game from an early time zone. It is possible to give a motivation to play and increase the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from setting change to execution of variable display 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. Suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values (for example, see FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B), FIGS. 20-30 (A) and (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a motivation to play a game for a predetermined period of time, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B), etc.),
It is described that an informing means (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516) capable of informing information about the executed suggestive effect may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, , the suggestive effect performed in the past can be confirmed, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the fifth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.),
Predetermined effects in which the suggestive effect is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, character effects in which the big win suggestive effect is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the big win suggestive effect, etc.) a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.;
Limiting means for limiting the execution of a predetermined effect when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, when the suggestive effect is executed during the jackpot, the execution of the character product effect is limited. See FIG. 20-34 (D)) According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the fifth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.),
Predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner in which the setting suggestion is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the big win suggestion performance, the big win suggestion performance is recognized. It is also described that additional effects such as character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc., that make the game difficult to play may be provided.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the fifth invention,
A predetermined control period in an advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period, an interval period, an ending period, etc. during a jackpot game) differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 11 of the fifth invention,
A predetermined control period (for example, variable time) for variable display differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-7)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 12 of the fifth invention,
Equipped with an opening/closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulation member (for example, security cover 121IW500A/security cover 121IW500B/security cover 121IW500C) capable of regulating the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulating member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operating portion is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, when the game machine frame 121IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 121IW500A maintains a restricted state in which operations on the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are restricted, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened. 20-2, FIG. 20-3, and FIGS. 48)
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

In addition, the characteristic portion 121IW also includes a sixth invention described below. In other words, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set set value. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. In JP-A-2010-200902, a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is sent from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the change stop command It is described that, based on the values, three types of presentation patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, are displayed. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value specifying command) is not normal. In a game machine that is configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set values, there is a risk that interest in the game may rather be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means that can be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") (for example, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 121IWS029) and
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100),
Information output means (for example, step 121IWS031, S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set and ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control A part that executes steps 121IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906 in the CPU 120),
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the suggestive effect executing means limits the execution of the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines N in step 121IWS513 and N in step S708). N, when N in S905, pre-game suggesting effect, during-game suggesting effect, and during big hit suggesting effect are not executed)
According to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the sixth invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 121IWS031 and S108 to transmit the set value command when the power is turned on and when the variation starts. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the setting value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means performs, as the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect with a high degree of specificity of the set value (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect and a suggestive effect during the game according to the third effect mode, and a jackpot during the fourth effect mode). Suggestion performance) and a second suggestion performance with a low degree of specificity of the set value (for example, a pre-game suggestion performance by the first performance mode, a game suggestion performance, and a big hit suggestion performance) can be executed. According to this configuration, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means performs a suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect or According to such a configuration, it is possible to make players interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game, and to start the game from an early time zone. It is possible to give motivation to play, and to increase amusement in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from setting change to execution of variable display 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. Suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values (for example, see FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B), FIGS. 20-30 (A) and (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a motivation to play a game for a predetermined period of time, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B), etc.),
It is described that an informing means (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516) capable of informing information about the executed suggestive effect may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, , the suggestive effect performed in the past can be confirmed, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the sixth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.),
Predetermined effects in which the suggestive effect is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, character effects in which the big win suggestive effect is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the big win suggestive effect, etc.) a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.;
Limiting means for limiting the execution of a predetermined effect when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, when the suggestive effect is executed during the jackpot, the execution of the character product effect is limited. See FIG. 20-34 (D)) According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the sixth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at a different rate according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A) and (B)),
Predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner in which the setting suggestion is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the big win suggestion performance, the big win suggestion performance is recognized. It is described that additional effects such as character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc., that make the game difficult to play may be provided.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the sixth invention,
A predetermined control period in an advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period, an interval period, an ending period, etc. during a jackpot game) differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the sixth invention,
A predetermined control period (for example, variable time) for variable display differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-7)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 11 of the sixth invention,
Equipped with an opening/closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulation member (for example, security cover 121IW500A/security cover 121IW500B/security cover 121IW500C) capable of regulating the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulating member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operating portion is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, when the game machine frame 121IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 121IW500A maintains a restricted state in which operations on the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are restricted, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened. 20-2, FIG. 20-3, and FIGS. 48)
It is described that it may be so, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

In addition, the characteristic portion 121IW also includes a seventh invention described below. In other words, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set set value. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. In JP-A-2010-200902, a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to the setting value before and after the change is sent from the main control board to the production control board, and the setting before and after the change obtained by the change stop command It is described that, based on the values, three types of presentation patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, are displayed. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an erroneous suggestion effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value specifying command) is not normal. In a game machine that is configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set values, there is a risk that interest in the game may rather be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the seventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Setting means that can be set to one of the setting values of multiple stages based on the setting operation (for example, the setting value "1" to the setting value "3") (for example, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 121IWS029) and
Game control means capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100),
Information output means (for example, step 121IWS031, S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can output setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set and ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control A part that executes steps 121IWS509 to S515, S704 to S709, and S901 to S906 in the CPU 120),
The suggestion effect execution means is
As the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect and a suggestive effect during the game according to the third effect mode, a suggestive effect during the jackpot according to the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestive effect (for example, a game according to the first effect mode) It is possible to execute a previous suggesting effect, a suggesting effect during a game, a suggesting effect during a big hit, and
When the set value information output from the information output means is not normal, the second suggestive effect can be executed as the suggestive effect without executing the first suggestive effect as the suggestive effect (for example, The effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-game suggesting effect and the during-game suggesting effect by the third effect mode, and the jackpot middle suggesting effect by the fourth effect mode by executing steps 121IWS514, S709, and S906.)
According to this feature, in a gaming machine configured to be able to control an advantageous state based on a set value, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the seventh invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 121IWS031 and S108 to transmit the set value command when the power is turned on and when the variation starts. do)
According to such a configuration, even if the setting value information cannot be input normally at a certain timing, the setting value information can be input normally at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the seventh invention,
The suggestive effect execution means performs, as the suggestive effect, a first suggestive effect with a high degree of specificity of the set value (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect and a suggestive effect during the game according to the third effect mode, and a jackpot during the fourth effect mode). Suggestion performance) and a second suggestion performance with a low degree of specificity of the set value (for example, a pre-game suggestion performance by the first performance mode, a game suggestion performance, and a big hit suggestion performance) can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the seventh invention,
Using a plurality of types of determination data (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect determination table, a during-game suggestive effect determination table, a jackpot during a suggestive effect determination table) for determining the suggestive effect execution mode, the suggestive effect execution mode is determined. Suggestion effect determination means to be determined (for example, step 121IWS510, S512, S514, S705, S707, S709, S902, S904, S906 in the effect control CPU 120 is provided),
The suggestive effect determining means includes:
Using the decision data according to the setting value set among the plurality of types of decision data, the execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122 Step 121IWS510, S705 and S902 are executed based on the set values stored in the
When the set value information is not input normally, using dedicated determination data (for example, a pre-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C, a game suggestive effect determination table, a jackpot mid-suggestive effect determination table), Determines the execution mode of the suggested effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggested effect determination table for effect mode C, the during-game suggested effect determination table, and the jackpot mid-suggested effect determination table, step 121 IWS 514 , S709 and S906)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the seventh invention,
The suggestive effect execution means performs a suggestive effect (for example, pre-game suggestive effect or According to this configuration, the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game is made interesting, and the game can be played from an early time zone. It is possible to give motivation to play, and to increase amusement in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the seventh invention,
The suggestive effect execution means is set at least during the game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (from setting change to execution of variable display 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. Suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values (for example, see FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B), FIGS. 20-30 (A) and (B)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a motivation to play a game for a predetermined period of time, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the seventh invention,
The suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B), etc.),
It is described that an informing means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516) capable of informing information about the executed suggestive effect may be further provided, and according to such a configuration, , the suggestive effect performed in the past can be confirmed, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the seventh invention,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.),
Predetermined effects in which the suggestive effect is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, character effects in which the big win suggestive effect is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the big win suggestive effect) a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.;
Limiting means for limiting the execution of a predetermined effect when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character product effect is limited. See FIG. 20-34 (D)) According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the seventh invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.),
Predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner in which the setting suggestion is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the big win suggestion performance, the big win suggestion performance is recognized. It is also described that additional effects such as character effects, light guide plate effects, error displays, etc., that make the game difficult to play may be provided.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the seventh invention,
A predetermined control period in an advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period, an interval period, an ending period, etc. during a jackpot game) differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 11 of the seventh invention,
A predetermined control period (for example, variable time) for variable display differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-7)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 12 of the seventh invention,
Equipped with an opening/closing body that can be opened and closed, and a regulation member (for example, security cover 121IW500A/security cover 121IW500B/security cover 121IW500C) capable of regulating the operation of the operation unit,
When the opening/closing body is closed, the regulating member maintains the regulated state in which the operation of the operating portion is regulated, and when the opening/closing body is opened, the regulated state can be released (for example, when the game machine frame 121IW003 is closed). In this state, the security cover 121IW500A maintains a restricted state in which operations on the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are restricted, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened. 20-2, FIG. 20-3, and FIGS. 48)
It is described that such a configuration may be used, and according to such a configuration, security is improved.

It should be noted that this characteristic portion 121IW is configured so that it can be changed to three types of production modes A to C. Assuming that a predetermined set value that is low in the degree of advantage for the player is set, the suggestive effect can be executed (configuration of the above-mentioned fifth invention), and when the effect mode B is controlled, the set value is set. When the information is not input normally, the execution of the suggestive effect is restricted (configuration of the sixth aspect of the invention), and when the effect mode C is controlled, the set value information is input normally. If not, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the second suggestive effect is configured to be executable as the suggestive effect (configuration of the above seventh invention). I can't limit it. For example, it is possible to switch which of the control methods of the fifth invention to the seventh invention is used to execute the suggestive effect according to the game state. In this case, for example, if the game state is a normal state, if the set value information is not input normally, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect assuming that the set value is set to a predetermined set value with a low degree of advantage for the player. Configuration (configuration of the fifth invention above), and if the game state is a time saving state, if the set value information is not input normally, it is configured to limit the execution of the suggestive effect (the sixth invention above) configuration), and if the game state is a probability variable state, when the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestion performance is not executed as the suggestion performance, and the second suggestion performance is executed as the suggestion performance ( The above configuration of the seventh invention) may be used.

In addition, it is not necessary to configure the suggestive effect to be executable by all of the control methods of the fifth to seventh inventions described above, and it is possible to implement the suggestive effect using only one of the control methods. good too.

In addition, in this characteristic part 121IW, when the setting value command itself cannot be received due to reasons such as missing data or garbled data, the execution of the suggestion effect is controlled by the control methods of the fifth to seventh inventions (suggestion Although the case of restricting production has been shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a setting value command is received, but if the received setting value command is inconsistent, the suggestive effect may be restricted. In this case, for example, each time a set value command is received, the set value indicated by the set value command received by the effect control means is stored. If the set value indicated by the set value command received in the previous step does not match the previously stored set value, it is determined that an inconsistency has occurred, and the suggestive effect is executed by the control methods of the above fifth to seventh inventions. You may make it control (limit suggestion production).

Also, the way in which the game is differentiated for each set value "1" to "3" is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, in the case of odd-numbered setting values such as setting values "1" and "3", when renso (the occurrence of a succession of jackpots during a variable probability state) is likely to occur, and renso occurs. In the case of even-numbered set values such as set value "2", the set value is configured to be relatively constant and does not change. A suggestive effect suggesting an odd number may be configured to be executable. In this case, if the set value command cannot be received normally, the control method of the fifth to seventh inventions is used to control the execution of the suggesting effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number. It may be configured to (limit the suggestive effect).

In addition, the method of controlling the execution of the suggestive effect when the set value command shown in the above fifth to seventh inventions cannot be received normally includes the look-ahead zone effect as the suggestive effect, the suggestive effect during reach, and the effect stage It is also possible to apply to the production by changing the .

In addition, this characterizing portion 121IW also includes an eighth invention described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that setting values are suggested only during variable display, and the interest cannot be enhanced sufficiently. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the eighth invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5, etc.) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, setting suggestive effect) suggesting the set value,
The suggestive effect execution means provides a suggestive effect (e.g., a pre-game suggestive effect) at a different rate according to the set value at least during a period from when the set value is changed until the first variable display is executed. ), which is characterized by the fact that it is possible to execute the state of the game machine before the start of the game, and the game can be played from an early time zone. It is possible to give motivation to play, and to increase amusement in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of performance identification information (for example, decoration pattern),
The suggestive effect execution means provides a suggestive effect (for example, It is described that the display of the initial odd numbers) may be executed, and according to such a configuration, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the eighth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect according to the set value when the power supply to the game machine is restored after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 20 -23 As shown in (A) and (B), a pre-game suggestion effect determination table with different determination values is used)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the eighth invention,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute a specific suggestive effect suggesting the set value after the variable display is started (for example, a suggestive effect during a game, a suggestive effect during a big win, etc.),
It is described that the specific suggestive effect may have a higher degree of reliability for the set value suggested than the suggestive effect, and according to such a configuration, the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the eighth invention,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media (for example, game balls),
Based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) a game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12);
Information display means (for example, display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means is capable of displaying set values (for example, a portion of the display monitor 121IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs.

In addition, the characteristic portion 121IW also includes a ninth invention described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that it cannot effectively motivate the player to play the game, and the interest cannot be enhanced sufficiently. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the ninth invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, setting suggestive effect) suggesting the set value,
The suggestive effect executing means performs the setting during the game until at least a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting is changed until the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. Suggestive effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values (for example, see FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B), FIGS. 20-30 (A) and (B)).
According to this feature, it is possible to give the player a motivation to play a game for a predetermined period of time, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player,
variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern;
variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means;
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios depending on whether the set value is changed or not (for example, FIG. 20-6(A), ( B) see),
It is described that the variable display execution means may execute variable display using a common background image when the setting value is changed and when the setting value is not changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the ninth invention,
variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern;
variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means;
The variable display pattern determination means determines one of the plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A), (B), etc.),
The variable display executing means can execute variable display using a common background image when the set value is set to the first set value and when the set value is set to the second set value by the setting means. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the ninth invention,
The suggestive effect execution means determines that a predetermined condition has been established within a predetermined period (for example, a big hit in a specific period, the number of times the ready-to-win effect or pseudo-continuous effect has been executed reaches a predetermined number, or a specific super ready-to-win effect or that the advance notice effect has been executed, etc.), the suggestive effect can be executed (for example, if a big win occurs within a specific period, the suggestive effect can be executed during the big hit. Fig. 20-34 ( A), (B) reference)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the ninth invention,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media (for example, game balls),
Based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) a game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12);
An information display means (for example, a display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means is capable of displaying set values (for example, a portion of the display monitor 121IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs.

In addition, the characteristic portion 121IW also includes a tenth invention described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that it is not possible to confirm the suggestive effects executed in the past, and thus the interest cannot be enhanced sufficiently. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the tenth invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, setting suggestive effect) suggesting the set value,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-30 (A), (B), etc.),
A game machine characterized by further comprising notifying means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516) capable of notifying information about the executed suggestive effect is described. , the suggestive effect performed in the past can be confirmed, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the tenth invention,
The notification means can notify the number of times that the suggested effect is executed (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the tenth invention,
The notification means can notify the contents of the executed suggestive effect (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the tenth invention,
The notifying means can notify the information regarding the executed suggestive effect during the customer waiting time when the variable display is not executed (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S121IWS516).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the tenth invention,
information generating means for generating information (for example, execution history information) about the executed suggestive effect;
image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) from which the information can be read by an imaging device;
It is described that a display means (for example, an image display device 5) for displaying the specific image in a manner that can be captured by the imaging device may be provided. can increase

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the tenth invention,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media (for example, game balls),
Based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) a game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12);
An information display means (for example, a display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means is capable of displaying set values (for example, a portion of the display monitor 121IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs.

In addition, the characterizing portion 121IW also includes an eleventh invention described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize due to other effects, interest may be lost. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the eleventh invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, setting suggestive effect) suggesting the set value,
The suggestive effect executing means can execute the suggestive effect at different ratios according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-34 (A), (B), etc.),
Predetermined effects in which the suggestive effect is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestive effect (for example, character effects in which the big win suggestive effect is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the big win suggestive effect) a predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.;
Limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined performance when the suggestive performance is executed (for example, when the suggestive performance is executed during the big hit, the execution of the character performance is restricted. See (D))
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the eleventh invention,
The restricting means changes the execution timing of at least one of the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timings of the suggested effect and the predetermined effect overlap (for example, one of them is executed during the fanfare period and the other is performed during the ending period). change it to run during the period)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the eleventh invention,
The limiting means prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestive effect is executed (for example, when the suggestive effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the character product effect is prohibited. See FIG. 20-34 (D). )
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the eleventh invention,
When the suggestive effect is executed, the limiting means executes the predetermined effect in a performance mode in which the suggestive effect is not difficult to recognize (for example, the movable member 121IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from the normal one (for example, during the big hit). Control so that it does not stop at the position overlapping with the dialogue image by production))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the eleventh invention,
Both the suggestive effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect in which a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5) include display on one display means (for example, the image display device 5),
It is described that the first display means may display a display related to the suggestive effect with priority over a display related to the predetermined effect. can be done.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the eleventh invention,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media (for example, game balls),
Based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) a game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12);
An information display means (for example, a display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means is capable of displaying set values (for example, a portion of the display monitor 121IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs.

In addition, the characteristic portion 121IW also includes a twelfth invention described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the player may lose interest in the game due to execution of setting suggestion effects that are not preferable to the player. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the twelfth invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
a setting suggestion executing means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests the set value,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIGS. 20-34 (A) and (B), etc.),
Predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a manner in which the setting suggestion is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the big win suggestion performance, the big win suggestion performance is recognized. The game machine is further equipped with a hard-to-play character effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, etc.), and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the loss of interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, performance of a character) to operate the movable member (for example, the movable member 121IW101). , can enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the twelfth invention,
a light-transmitting light guide plate (for example, light guide plate 121IW103) that can transmit light;
and a light emitter provided so that light can enter from the end surface of the light guide plate,
The light guide plate is provided with a reflection part for reflecting light incident on the inside of the light guide plate from the end surface of the light guide plate by the light emitter and emitting the light to the front surface of the game machine,
The predetermined notification means can execute a predetermined notification (e.g., light guide plate effect) for emitting light from the reflecting portion provided on the light guide plate to the front surface of the gaming machine by causing the light emitter to emit light. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the twelfth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing a predetermined notification that displays an error. With such a configuration, an error can be appropriately notified.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the twelfth invention,
The setting suggestion executing means provides a first setting suggestion that suggests that the first set value is set (for example, a suggestion effect during the jackpot in the first effect mode; see FIGS. 20-34 (A) and (B)). , a second setting suggestion that suggests that the second set value is set to have a higher advantage for the player than the first set value (for example, a suggestion effect during the jackpot in the third effect mode; FIG. 20-34 ( A), see (B)) and can be executed,
The predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate when the first setting suggestion is performed than when the second setting suggestion is performed (see, for example, FIG. 20-34(E)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the twelfth invention,
A setting suggestion setting means capable of setting the execution ratio of setting suggestions is provided (for example, a setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, an operation means such as a push button 31B, or an operation means such as a switch provided inside the game machine (management can be operated only by the user), so that the settings related to the setting suggestion effect can be changed)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the twelfth invention,
A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information,
A variable display device that can variably display identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) on which identification information is arranged,
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the first variable display of the identification information after the setting value is changed,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the first variable display of the identification information after the setting value is changed. A decline in interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the twelfth invention,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media (for example, game balls),
Based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) a game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12);
An information display means (for example, a display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means is capable of displaying set values (for example, a portion of the display monitor 121IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs.

In addition, the characteristic portion 121IW also includes a thirteenth invention described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that gambling properties may become too high when the advantage is set to be high. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the thirteenth invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5, etc.) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set.
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, the fanfare period, the interval period, the ending period, etc. during the jackpot game) differs depending on the set value (see, for example, FIG. 20-5).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the thirteenth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5 (B))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the thirteenth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5(B))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the thirteenth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5 (B))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing games using gaming values,
a game value imparting means for imparting a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means has a first set value (for example, a set value of 3), and the game value imparted by the game value imparting means is larger than the first set value so as to match the game value used in the game. It can be set to a second setting value (for example, setting value 1) that occupies a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (for example, FIGS. 20-5 (A) and (B) reference)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the thirteenth invention,
It is described that a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect suggesting a set value (for example, a suggestive effect during a big hit) may be provided in a predetermined control period in an advantageous state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 7 of the thirteenth invention,
Equipped with production execution means capable of executing production,
The effect executing means can execute a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) during a predetermined control period in an advantageous state, regardless of a set value. It is described that such a configuration may enhance the interest of the predetermined control period in advantageous conditions.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 8 of the thirteenth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be determined in advance according to the set value. You can prevent it from slipping.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 9 of the thirteenth invention,
A gaming machine that can be controlled in a plurality of types of advantageous states,
The game control means can be controlled to any one of the plurality of types of advantageous states (for example, jackpot types A to C) by different ratios based on the set value,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the advantageous state (see, for example, FIG. 20-5(B))
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 10 of the thirteenth invention,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media (for example, game balls),
Based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) a game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12);
An information display means (for example, a display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means is capable of displaying set values (for example, a portion of the display monitor 121IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs.

In addition, the characteristic portion 121IW also includes a fourteenth invention described below. That is, conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, disclosed in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that gambling properties may become too high when the advantage is set to be high. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the fourteenth invention for solving the problem,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3);
A game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5, etc.) that can execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set.
A predetermined control period (for example, variable time) for variable display differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-7)
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the fourteenth invention,
The variable display period differs depending on the setting value that is set (see, for example, FIG. 20-7)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the fourteenth invention,
It is stated that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be changed according to the set value. can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the fourteenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing games using gaming values,
a game value imparting means for imparting a game value based on the establishment of a specific condition;
The setting means has a first set value (for example, a set value of 3), and the game value imparted by the game value imparting means is larger than the first set value so as to match the game value used in the game. It can be set to a second setting value (for example, setting value 1) that occupies a higher proportion,
The predetermined control period for variable display is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the fourteenth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period regarding the variable display may be determined in advance according to the set value. You can prevent it from slipping.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 6 of the fourteenth invention,
variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern;
variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means;
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different ratios according to the set value (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of means 7 of the fourteenth invention,
A game machine capable of playing games using game media (for example, game balls),
Based on the entry of the game medium into a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712) a game value giving means for giving a game value (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing of S12);
An information display means (for example, a display monitor 121IW029) capable of displaying information about the game value given by the game value giving means,
The information display means is capable of displaying set values (for example, a portion of the display monitor 121IW029 that can display the continuous ratio, the role ratio, and the base).
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing costs.

It should be noted that the configuration indicated by the characterizing portion 121IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration indicated by other characterizing portions such as the characterizing portion 31AK to form a gaming machine. For example, when executing the look-ahead zone effect, the suggestive effect during reach, the effect by changing the effect stage, the suggestive effect before the game, the suggestive effect during the game, and the suggestive effect during the big hit shown in the feature part 121IW, the lookahead zone effect and the reach When a predetermined period of time elapses from the start of a mid-suggestive performance, a performance by changing the performance stage, a pre-game suggestive performance, a mid-game suggestive performance, and a jackpot mid-suggestive performance, the look-ahead zone performance and the in-reach suggestive performance are performed in the same manner as the feature part 31AK. Titles corresponding to effects, effects by changing the effect stage, pre-game suggestive effects, during-game suggestive effects, and jackpot-suggestive effects may be configured to be able to be notified.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 134IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 134IW will be described. In this characterizing portion 134IW, set values such as the probability of winning a big hit (playing ball rate) can be changed, and a plurality of options are presented as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set values. It is configured to be able to execute a selection suggestion effect to be selected. It should be noted that the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be settable. For example, even if the administrator of the gaming machine can change the settings so that some or all of the setting suggestion effects (for example, the selection suggestion effect) are not executed, or the execution ratio is reduced (or increased). good. For example, after the power is turned on, a setting screen is displayed, and by operating operating means such as the push button 31B or operating means such as a switch provided inside the game machine (only the administrator can operate), settings related to the setting suggestion effect can be made. may be changed.

In this characteristic portion 134IW, it is possible to present and select a plurality of types of options in the selection suggestion presentation, and it is possible to suggest different contents depending on the type of option. For example, by presenting and selecting options of the first type (first to sixth options, etc., which will be described later), information about setting values (for example, settings with a high degree of advantage, etc.) are suggested, and the second By presenting and selecting the type options, information on the variable display during execution (for example, the degree of expectation of the big hit, etc.) and information on the production during execution (for example, the development and commentary of the production, the world view of the story-type production) information explaining the

A third type of option may be provided in addition to the first type and second type of options, and the settings related to the effect may be changed by selecting the third type of option. For example, by selecting the option of the third type, it is possible to set a specific character as the main character, set related to BGM, set related to background image, set specific effects (one-shot announcement effect, premiere effect, pre-reading effect, etc.). Settings related to appearance frequency and expectations are changed. In the second type and the third type, as in the first type, a plurality of options are provided corresponding to settings related to suggestive information and effects.

In this characterizing portion 134IW, a selection suggestion effect in which only first-type options (such as first to sixth options described later) are presented will be mainly described, but only second-type and third-type options are presented. It is also possible to execute a selection suggestion effect in which multiple types of options are presented in a mixed manner. Whether or not to select or present the second type or third type of option may be determined by a lottery in selection suggestion effect determination processing to be described later. For example, the selection and presentation of options of the second type and the third type are determined by lottery based on the variation pattern, game state, etc., and the set value (for example, depending on the variation pattern, game state, etc., and the set value The setting value may also be suggested by the selection/presentation of the second type and third type options. That is, in the selection suggestion effect, the set value may be suggested regardless of which of the first to third types of options is presented/selected. In this case, the setting value may be suggested by selecting and presenting a specific option of the second type or the third type, or the setting value may be suggested by a combination of the presented options. may be made.

Although the first to third types have been described as the types of options, these may not be strictly distinguished. That is, in addition to suggesting the setting value, there may be options for suggesting information about the variable display being executed and information about the effect being executed, or suggesting a change in the setting related to the effect, setting value and An option may be provided that suggests information about the dynamic display in progress.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 134IW, a plurality of options are presented, and when the player operates the push button 31B or the like, a selection suggestion effect in which one of the options is selected (that is, the player substantially selects However, it may be possible for the player to decide which option to select from the presented options. Specifically, after a plurality of options are presented, the option to be selected may be determined based on the player's selection operation using the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, or the like. In this case, only the options of the third type may be selectable, and the options of the first and second types may not be selectable, or both types of options may be selectable. When any type of option can be selected, for example, when the first type and second type options are presented, only the type is displayed in a recognizable manner (specifically, the first type option image is displayed), and when selected, the content of the option is displayed (specifically, an option image indicating the first option "low", which will be described later, is displayed). good.

(Customization of production)
This characterizing section 134IW is configured so that the player can change the settings related to each effect. For example, when an operation of the push button 31B is detected during execution of a customer waiting demonstration effect, the image display device 5 displays a plurality of customizable effects and setting items for each effect (for example, setting a specific character as the main character). , settings related to BGM, settings related to a background image, settings related to the appearance frequency of specific effects (one-shot announcement effects, premiere effects, pre-reading effects, etc.) are displayed. Then, according to the tilting operation of the stick controller 31A, the cursor display for designating the setting item of each advance notice effect displayed on the image display device 5 moves to another setting item, and according to the pressing operation of the push button 31B. setting is changed to the setting item specified by the cursor display. With such a configuration, the performance effect of each performance can be enhanced, and the interest can be improved. In place of or in addition to the execution of the customer waiting demo effect, the player may be allowed to change the setting of each advance notice effect in a specific situation such as during a big win game or during a series of games.

(Selection Suggestion Effect Decision Processing)
FIG. 21-1 is a flow chart showing an example of selection suggestion effect determination processing. The selection suggestion effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the selection-suggestion effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the selection-suggestion effect (step 134IWS001).

In step S134IWS001, a selection suggestion performance execution determination table is selected according to the variation pattern, and whether or not to execute a selection suggestion performance is determined according to the selected selection suggestion performance execution determination table and the set value.

FIG. 21-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a selection suggestion effect execution determination table. FIG. 21-2(A) shows the first selection suggestion effect execution determination table used when the variation pattern is accompanied by super reach, and FIG. 21-2(A) shows the variation pattern accompanied by super reach. A second selection suggestion effect execution determination table used when not is shown.

In the first and second selection suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-2 (A) and (B), the selection suggestion effect execution ratio is set in the order of setting values "1" > "2" > "3". Judgment values are assigned so as to increase. With such a configuration, execution of the selection suggesting effect suggests that an advantageous set value is set.

Also, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio of executing the selection suggestion effect is higher in the first selection suggestion effect determination table than in the second selection suggestion effect determination table. With such a configuration, the execution of the selection-suggestion performance increases the ratio of execution of the super reach, and it is possible to have expectations for the execution of the super reach and the big win. . In addition, in this characterizing portion 134IW, the selection suggestion effect is executed before the super reach is started, but it may be executed at any timing including after the super reach is started.

Further, when it is determined not to execute the selection suggestion effect, only the sixth option "?" (details will be described later), which is not an option suggesting information about the setting value, may be presented and selected. .

When it is determined to execute the selection suggestion effect (Y of step 134IWS002), the effect control CPU 120 determines the option to be selected in the selection suggestion effect (step 134IWS003).

In step S134IWS003, a selection option determination table is selected according to whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an option to be selected is determined according to the selected selection option determination table and the set value.

FIG. 21-3 is an explanatory diagram showing a selection option determination table. FIG. 21-3(A) shows a first selection option determination table used when a predetermined condition is not satisfied (details of the predetermined condition will be described later), and FIG. A second selection option determination table used when establishment is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 21-3(A) and (B), in this characteristic portion 134IW, first to sixth options are provided as options that can be selected (that is, can be presented) in the selection suggestion effect. In the selection suggestion effect, an image containing the characters "low" is displayed as the first option, an image containing the characters "high" is displayed as the second option, and an image including the characters "even" is displayed as the third option. An image containing the character "odd" is displayed as the fourth option, an image containing the character "1" is displayed as the fifth option, and an image containing the character "?" is displayed as the sixth option. be.

In the selection option determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-3(A) and (B), the ratio of selecting the first option "low" is high in the order of the setting value "3">"2">"1". Judgment values are assigned in the order of value "1">"2">"3" so that the ratio of selecting the second option "high" increases. That is, when the first option "low" is selected, it is suggested that the advantage is set to a low set value (proportion is high), and when the second option "high" is selected, the advantage is It will suggest that it is set to a high setting value (high percentage).

Further, in the case of the setting values "1" and "3", the fourth option "odd" is selected more frequently than the third option "even", and in the case of the setting value "2", the fourth option The judgment values are assigned so that the third option "even" is more likely to be selected than the option "odd". That is, when the third option "even" is selected, it is suggested that the set value is set to an even number (high percentage), and when the fourth option "odd" is selected, the set value is set to an odd number. It will be suggested that it is set (high percentage).

In addition, determination values are assigned so that the fifth option "1" is selected only when the set value is "1". That is, when the fifth option "1" is selected, the set value "1" is determined.

As for the sixth option "?", it is selected for any set value, and the difference in the selection ratio between each set value is small, so it does not positively suggest information about the set value. Therefore, it can be said that selection of the sixth option “?” in the selection suggestion effect means selection of a failure. It should be noted that the rate at which the sixth option "?" is selected may differ according to the setting value, not limited to the configuration of this characteristic portion 134IW. That is, the set value is suggested by the percentage of selection of the sixth option "?" ).

In the selection option determination tables shown in FIGS. 21-3(A) and (B), the fifth option "1" is configured to be selected only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, in this characteristic part 134IW, after the power is turned on, a jackpot of a specific jackpot type (for example, a jackpot with a high degree of advantage such as a 16-round jackpot or a variable probability jackpot, or a jackpot with a low degree of advantage such as a 2-round jackpot or a normal jackpot). occurs, the predetermined condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, the options that can be selected in the selection suggestion effect change according to the progress of the game (that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition), so that attention can be paid to the progress of the game, and interest is improved. be able to.

It should be noted that, without being limited to the configuration of the characteristic portion 134IW, for example, it may be configured such that a predetermined condition is established when the number of consecutive residences reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, five times). By applying such a configuration to a gaming machine or the like with a high consecutive house rate, it is possible to suitably execute the selection suggestion effect. Further, for example, when the number of winning balls (or the number of winning balls paid out) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10,000 shots), a predetermined condition may be established. By applying such a configuration to a game machine or the like in which the number of rounds is small and a big win is likely to occur, it is possible to suitably execute the selection suggestion effect. Further, for example, when the number of variations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times, the cumulative number of variations or the number of variations between big hits), a predetermined condition may be established. With such a configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to continue playing the game and to enhance the interest while the big win is not occurring. Also, for example, when the number of times of losing after super reach reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times. The number of cumulative fluctuations may be the number of fluctuations, or the number of fluctuations between big hits), a predetermined condition is established. good too. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide motivation to continue the game and reduce disappointment when losing after super reach. Further, for example, in a gaming machine having a configuration in which a V winning area is provided in a large winning opening, and a game ball enters the V winning area while the large winning opening is open, a big win occurs, although the large winning opening is open, When the number of times the game ball does not enter the V winning area reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times, the number of cumulative fluctuations or the number of fluctuations between big hits), a predetermined condition is established. good too. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide motivation to continue the game and reduce disappointment when losing after super reach.

In this characteristic portion 134IW, once a predetermined condition is satisfied, the satisfied state is maintained until a specific condition is satisfied. Then, in this characteristic portion 134IW, the specific condition is established when the power of the gaming machine is turned off. In other words, the fifth option "1", which has become selectable due to the establishment of the predetermined condition, continues to be selectable until the power of the gaming machine is turned off. With such a configuration, even if the player changes after the predetermined condition is established, the fifth option "1" can be continuously selected, so that the new player can be motivated to play the game. .

In addition, it is not limited to the configuration of the characteristic portion 134IW, and for example, it may be configured such that the selection suggestion effect is executed during the big win game, and the specific condition is established when the big win game ends. Further, for example, when the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes), the specific condition is satisfied, and even if the game is started after that, the fifth option "1" remains unchanged until the predetermined condition is newly satisfied. It may not be selectable. In addition, for example, the number of executions of setting suggestion effects and execution details are accumulated as execution history information, and a two-dimensional code (for example, readable by a mobile terminal) containing the execution history information is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end of the game. can be displayed, the specific condition is met when the two-dimensional code is displayed, and even if the game is started after that, the fifth option "1" cannot be selected until the predetermined condition is newly met. good too.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines options to be presented in the selection suggestion effect (step 134IWS004).

In step S134IWS004, a presentation option determination table is selected according to whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied, and options to be presented are determined according to the selected presentation option determination table and set values.

FIG. 21-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a presentation option determination table. FIG. 21-4(A) shows the first presentation option determination table used when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, and FIG. 21-4(B) shows the second presentation option determination table used when the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is shown.

In this characterizing portion 134IW, four options are presented in the selection suggestion effect, so in step S134IWS004, three options other than the option to be selected are determined. Specifically, the process of determining the option to be presented according to the selected presentation option determination table and the set value is repeatedly executed three times.

As shown in FIGS. 21-4(A) and (B), the presentation option determination table and the selection option determination table determine options at a similar rate (that is, determine options with the same tendency) according to the set value. ) are assigned judgment values. Therefore, in this characterizing portion 134IW, in the selection suggestion effect, the ratio of options presented differs according to the set value, and the presented option also suggests the set value. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the user's attention to the presented options and enhance interest.

In this characteristic portion 134IW, the fifth option "1" cannot be selected when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, but the fifth option "1" can be presented even when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. is possible. However, since it is not selected when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the fifth option "1" is displayed in a grayed out state indicating that it cannot be selected. In addition, when displaying in a grayed-out mode indicating that the selection is not possible, if a predetermined condition is established (that is, if a jackpot of a specific jackpot type occurs), information suggesting that it can be selected is displayed. can be With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player aware of the existence of the fifth option "1" and to draw attention to the progress of the game (that is, the establishment of the predetermined condition), thereby improving the interest.

Further, in this characteristic portion 134IW, the fifth option "1" can be presented only when the set value is "1" or "2". In other words, the options that can be presented are different depending on the setting values that have been set. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the user's attention to the presented options and enhance interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 134IW, the options to be presented are determined according to the set value regardless of the selected options. can be Also, for example, there may be options that are not selected but are likely to be presented when a specific set value is set. Further, for example, the ratio of options to be presented may be the same for each setting value, and the ratio of options to be selected may differ for each setting value.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presentation position of the option to be selected in the selection suggestion effect (step 134IWS005).

In step S134IWS005, the presentation position of the option to be selected is determined according to the selection option presentation position determination table and the set value.

FIG. 21-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a selection option presentation position determination table. As shown in FIG. 21-5, this characteristic portion 134IW can present options at first to fourth presentation positions. In this characteristic portion 134IW, presentation of options will be described using an example in which options are arranged in two rows and two columns as shown in FIG. 21-6, but the arrangement of options is not limited to this example. For example, the options may be arranged in a horizontal row or a vertical row, or may be an arbitrary arrangement such as an arrangement in which a circle is cut into equal halves. Also, for example, only one option is displayed (or highlighted by enlargement or the like), and other options are displayed based on the player's scrolling operation using the stick controller 31A or the like (or automatically regardless of the scrolling operation). may be presented in such a manner that the options of are sequentially displayed.

In the selection option presentation position determination table shown in FIG. 21-5, the ratio of the first presentation position being selected is high in the order of the setting values "1" > "2" > "3", and the setting values "2" > "1". = "3", the ratio of selecting the second presentation position is high, and the ratio of selecting the third presentation position and the fourth presentation position is in the order of setting value "3" > "1" = "2". A judgment value is assigned so that That is, depending on which presentation position the selected option was presented, it is suggested that the set value is set to a high or low advantage (high ratio). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the presentation position of the option.

FIG. 21-6 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a selection suggestion effect. In this characteristic portion 134IW, as shown in FIG. A selection image is displayed as shown.

In the example of FIG. 21-6(2), an option image indicating the fourth option "Odd" is presented at the first presentation position (upper left), and an option indicating the sixth option "?" is presented at the second presentation position (upper right). An image is presented, an option image indicating the sixth option "?" is presented at the third presentation position (lower left), and an option image indicating the second option "high" is presented at the fourth presentation position (lower right). there is

Then, when the player operates the push button 31B or the like, an effect of selecting the fourth option "strange" at the first presentation position (upper left) is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21-6(3), the option image showing the fourth option "Odd" at the selected first presentation position (upper left) is displayed surrounded by effect images. In addition, in the lower right of the display area of the image display device 5, the text "Possibility of odd number setting!" is displayed to suggest that the set value is an odd number.

In this characteristic part 134IW, setting values are suggested by the types and presentation positions of the options presented in the selection suggestion performance, and the selected options, and the execution of the selection suggestion performance suggests that the expectation of the big win is high. Although an example has been described, a second type of option suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit may also be presented and selectable. Alternatively, options with different degrees of expectation for big hits may be presented and selected according to the set value. For example, when option A of the second type is displayed at a set value of 1, it suggests that the expectation of a big win is low, and when it is displayed at a set value of 3, it suggests that the expectation of a big win is high. You may do so. In this case, for example, an option suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is high and an option suggesting that the set value of the advantage is low, or an option suggesting that the expectation of a big win is low and the advantage It is possible to present options suggesting that the set value of is high, and to improve interest.

As described above, the characteristic portion 134IW includes the first invention described below. In other words, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set set value. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes performing display control of effects based on set values to display character images of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to increase the interest in the game in the gaming machine configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value. . Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1-1 of the first invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values “1” to set values “3”);
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a selection suggestive effect) at a different rate according to a set value,
The suggested production is
A production in which a plurality of options (for example, first to third types of options) are presented and one of the options is selected (see FIG. 21-6),
Options that can be presented differ depending on the set value (for example, the fifth option “1” can be presented only when the setting value is “1” or “2”. See FIG. 21-4).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, as the game machine of means 1-2 of the first invention,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values “1” to set values “3”);
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a selection suggestive effect) at a different rate according to a set value,
The suggested production is
A production in which a plurality of options (for example, first to third types of options) are presented and one of the options is selected (see FIG. 21-6),
The rate at which specific options are presented differs according to the set value (see Figure 21-4)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the first invention,
Suggestion effects differ in the rate at which specific options are selected according to the set values (see Figure 21-3).
According to such a configuration, since the ratio of options to be selected differs depending on the setting value, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the first invention,
In the suggestive effect, the ratio of which presentation position among the plurality of presentation positions the option is presented differs according to the set setting value (see Fig. 21-5).
According to such a configuration, since the ratio of options to be selected differs depending on the setting value, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the first invention,
Suggestion effects differ in the frequency of execution according to the set values (see Fig. 21-2).
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the frequency with which the suggestive effect is executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the first invention,
The suggestive effect can present options with different expectations that are controlled in an advantageous state according to the set value (for example, the second type option A is displayed when the set value is 1 It may be suggested that the degree of expectation for a big hit is low, and that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high when displayed when the set value is 3)
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to whether the control is in an advantageous state or not, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, the characteristic portion 134IW includes a second invention described below. In other words, conventionally, a pachinko machine configured to be able to set one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation, and to be able to control an advantageous state based on the set set value. As a game machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes performing display control of effects based on set values to display character images of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion. However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to increase the interest in the game in the gaming machine configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value. . Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a game machine of means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value “1” to setting value “3”);
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set value that has been set;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a selection suggestive effect) at different ratios according to set values;
Equipped with detection means (for example, stick controller 31A and push button 31B) capable of detecting the action of the player,
The suggested production is
A plurality of options (for example, options of the first to third types) are presented, and one of the options is selected based on the detection of the action of the player by the detection means (for example, the effect by the player An option is automatically selected based on the operation of pressing the push button 31B (see FIG. 21-6), or the player's intention is selected based on the player's selection operation using the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. the alternative is selected along), and
Options that can be presented differ depending on the set value (for example, the fifth option “1” can be presented only when the setting value is “1” or “2”. See FIG. 21-4).
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, as a game machine of means 1-2 of the second invention,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a setting means that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values “1” to set values “3”);
A game control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing control related to the advantageous state based on the set values that have been set;
a suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a set suggestive effect) at a different rate according to a set value;
Equipped with detection means (for example, stick controller 31A and push button 31B) capable of detecting the action of the player,
The suggested production is
A plurality of options (for example, first to third types of options) are presented, and one of the options is selected based on the detection of the action of the player by the detection means (for example, a presentation by the player An option is automatically selected based on the operation of pressing the push button 31B (see FIG. 21-6), or the player's intention is selected based on the player's selection operation using the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. the alternative is selected along), and
The rate at which specific options are presented differs according to the set value (see Figure 21-4)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 2 of the second invention,
It is described that the game may be provided with an effect setting change means capable of changing the settings related to the effect, and according to such a configuration, the effect of the effect can be enhanced and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 3 of the second invention,
In the suggestive effect, selectable options (for example, the fifth option) increase based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, occurrence of a specific jackpot type) (see FIG. 21-3).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the progress of the game and improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 4 of the second invention,
It is stated that the suggestive effect may be such that an option that has become selectable based on the establishment of a predetermined condition can be selected until a specific condition is established (the power supply of the game machine is turned off). Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute the suggestive effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of means 5 of the second invention,
It is stated that the suggestive effect may present options that cannot be selected, and with such a configuration, it is possible to make the players aware of the options and to make them pay attention to the progress of the game. It is possible to improve the game interest.

It should be noted that the configuration indicated by the characteristic portion 134IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration indicated by other characteristic portions such as the characteristic portion 31AK to form a gaming machine. For example, the selection suggestive effect shown in the characteristic part 134IW can be replaced with the pre-game suggestive effect shown in the characteristic part 121IW, the initial appearance effect, the suggestive effect during the game, the setting suggestion by the determination tendency of the variation pattern, the suggestive effect during the big hit, etc. It may be executable in combination with the setting suggestion effect.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko machine 2... Game board 3... Frame for game machine 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize winning port 11... Main board 12... Effect control board 13... Sound control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23...Count switch 30...Battering operation handle 31A...Stick controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 100...Game control microcomputer 101, 121...ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (1)

A game machine capable of playing games using game media and being controllable to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a game value imparting means for imparting a game value based on the entry of a game medium into a predetermined area;
an information display means capable of displaying information about the game value imparted by the game value imparting means;
setting means that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values;
Advantageous state control means capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on set values;
Output means capable of outputting information including setting information capable of specifying setting values; Suggestive effect executing means capable of executing suggestive effects at different ratios according to the setting values specified from the setting information output from the output means; ,
and a detection means capable of detecting the action of the player,
The suggestive effect includes a specific suggestive effect in which a plurality of options are presented and one of the options is selected based on the detection of the action of the player by the detecting means, and a specific degree of set value. and a second suggestive effect with a low specified degree of set value,
In the specific suggestion effect, the ratio at which specific options are presented differs according to the set value,
The specific option is an option that can be presented and can be selected when set to any one of a plurality of setting values,
The suggestion effect execution means is
During a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on to a predetermined time, the suggestive effect can be executed at a higher rate than during a period different from the predetermined period,
When the setting information output from the output means is not normal under control in a normal state, the suggestive effect is produced at a ratio corresponding to a predetermined set value with a low degree of advantage for the player among the plurality of set values. is executable and
When the setting information output from the output means is not normal while being controlled to a special state more advantageous than the normal state, the second suggestive effect can be executed without executing the first suggestive effect. ,
The information display means is capable of displaying set values that have been set.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images